Home

"user manual"

1. _ Lt Enter A Note You can create one bar code label by combining Steps 1 and 2 above Most of the examples in this manual use one bar code label 3 Scan this bar code label to exit Accumulate mode and enter the data record Exit Accumulate Mode _ TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Enter Accumulate Mode Purpose Enters Accumulate mode If you press any keys when using the Enter Accumulate command the keystrokes are accumulated as data From Network Not supported Keypad Not supported Scan Enter Accumulate Mode UUM 4 Backspace Purpose Deletes the last character from the current data record being accumulated If there is no data in the buffer the command has no effect From Network Not supported Keypad Not supported Scan Backspace 4p Clear Purpose Deletes the entire data record you are accumulating If there is no data in From Network Keypad Scan the buffer the command has no effect Not supported Not supported Clear Reader Command Reference Enter Purpose From Network Keypad Scan Enters the current data record and remains in Accumulate mode If no data exists a null string is entered Not supported Not supported Enter A Exit Accumulate Mode Purpose From Network Keypad Scan Exits Accumulate mode and transmits the curren
2. 242XU 111 Learning How to Use the Terminal 2 Adjusting the Display From the Keypad The Backlight key is one of the special features built into the terminal s keypad You can use the Backlight key to e Turn the backlight on and off on the terminal s display e Adjust the display contrast e Change the beep volume of the terminal s audio signals For a detailed description of the backlight contrast and beep volume commands see Chapter 8 Configuration Command Reference Note The Backlight key temporarily changes the backlight contrast or beep volume These changes are not saved permanently in flash memory Backlight key Goce 7 oO a QD ae Enter B OBOD 242XU 049 To turn the backlight on and off e Press 7 Turn the backlight on to more easily see the terminal s display in dimly lit environments The backlight stays on for the length of time set in the Display Backlight Timeout command or until you press again For more information about the command see Display Backlight Timeout in Chapter 8 Note You use the battery power at a faster rate with the backlight turned on 2 13 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual To change the display contrast e Press _f 7 Each time you press f 7 it makes the display contrast one level darker There are eight contrast levels If the contrast is at the darkest level and you press f Q7 the cont
3. Configuration Command Reference 5 Q 8 35 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Display Contrast Purpose Default Syntax Scan 8 36 Defines the contrast light or dark of the characters against the terminal display 3 DJdata Acceptable values for data are 0 light to 7 dark One of these bar codes DJ0 DJ2 4 DJ4 6 DJ6 Lighter DJ8 DJ1 3 Maximum Contrast DJ3 5 DJ5 7 Dark DJ7 Darker DJ9 Configuration Command Reference Interleaved 2 of 5 Purpose Default Syntax CAUTION Scan Enables or disables decoding of Interleaved 2 of 5 I 2 of 5 symbology I 2 of 5 is a high density self checking continuous numeric symbology It is mainly used in inventory distribution and the automobile industry Enabling I 2 of 5 automatically disables Code 2 of 5 Disabled CAdata Acceptable values for data are 0 Disabled 2 32 Fixed length even number only 97 Variable length without a check digit 98 Case code 6 or 14 with a check digit 99 Variable length with a check digit Caution Using the variable length without a check digit configuration option can cause substitution errors Conseil Des erreurs de substitution peuvent survenir si vous utilisez la longueur variable sans option de v rification de configuration de chiffres One of these bar codes Disable
4. xii Contents Appendix C Terminal Emulation Command Reference 3270 and 5250 TE Command Summary C 3 3270 and 5250 TE Keypad C 3 3270 and 5250 TECommand Summary C 5 3270 and 5250 Additional Functions C 9 VT100 220 320 and ANSI TE Command Summary C 10 VTXXX ANSI TE Keypad C 10 VIXXX ANSI TE Command Summary C 11 VTXXX ANSI Additional Functions C 13 Program Function Keys C 14 Glossary Index xiii Before You Begin Before You Begin This section introduces you to standard warranty provisions safety precautions warnings and cautions document formatting conventions and sources of additional product information A list of Intermec manuals is also provided to guide you in finding the appropriate information Warranty Information To receive a copy of the standard warranty provision for this product contact your local Intermec support services organization In the U S call 1 800 755 5505 and in Canada call 1 800 688 7043 Otherwise refer to the Worldwide Sales amp Service list that ships with this manual for the address and telephone number of your Intermec sales organization Safety Summary Your safety is extremely important Read and follow all warnings and cautions in this book before handling and operating Intermec equipment You can be seriously injured and equipment and data can be damaged if you do not follow the safety warnings and cautions Do not repair or adjust alone Do not r
5. 242XU 022 5 10 Running Applications 5 Viewport Mode Select one of these viewport movement modes Follow Enables viewport Follow Cursor mode Center Enables viewport Center mode The viewport always centers around the cursor Disable Disables viewport movement You must manually move the cursor to each field in the screen You can set these parameters for Follow Cursor mode only Side Boundary The viewport moves when the cursor is this number of characters from the right or left side boundary You can enter a number from 1 to 10 Side Jump The number of characters the viewport moves right or left when you reach a horizontal boundary You can enter a number from 1 to 10 Vertical Boundary The viewport moves when the cursor is this number of characters from the top or bottom boundary You can enter a number from 1 to 10 Vertical Jump The number of characters the terminal moves up or down when you reach a vertical boundary You can enter a number from 1 to 10 5 11 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 5 12 Exiting the TE Configuration Menu After entering all configuration parameters you are prompted to save the new configuration and exit the Configuration menu You can choose between several options when prompted to save the new configuration To exit the TE Configuration menu 1 From the TE Configuration menu choose Exit Config and press The Save new configuration screen appears
6. Keypad fj Y Scan Erase Input EINP 3270 and 5250 TE Command Reference 9 Erase to End of Field 3270 terminals only This command erases all characters from the cursor to the end of the field If the field is protected or the cursor is in a field attribute instead of an input position then pressing this key will lock the keypad Press Reset to unlock the keypad Keypad f o Scan Erase to End of Field AAA A EOF Error Reset 5250 terminals only Error Reset unlocks the keypad when it has locked due to a 5250 error condition It also resets the Help Insert System Request and Command keys An error message appears when data entry occurs in S 3X or AS 400 applications Keypad f ese Error Reset ERR 9 7 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 9 8 Fast Cursor Right or Left This command moves the cursor two positions to the right or left rather than one Keypad Fast Cursor Right f _6 Fast Cursor Left f 4 Scan Fast Cursor Right FCRT Fast Cursor Left FCLT 3270 and 5250 TE Command Reference 9 Field and Field 5250 terminals only The Field command operates as a Field Exit key in all fields The Field command operation can vary depending on the system With most systems the Field command operates the same as the Field and Field Exit commands except that you can only use it in signed numeric
7. N left single quote oW I R I o M _ underline o O pipe O Space TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Numbers 0 1 2 AA MU AMA i T Bs 3 4 5 UAC AUN A M T 6 7 8 MUM A MU s L z 9 Q B 10 Full ASCII Charts B Uppercase Letters A B C A B EER D E F a D R t G H kE H J K L i fd K M N O M N O P Q R p Q R S T U GE iil Fiat U B 11 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Uppercase Letters continued V W X ENE W X Y Z aye 7 Lowercase Letters a b c A B 4C d e f D E pales g h i 4G H g j k 4 1 Ke 47 m n o M 4 N 0O B 12 Full ASCII Charts Lowercase Letters continued p 4P S 4g v EEIE y Yr q Q T t w W Z 4 7 r ER EEUE u X EEE B 13 Terminal Emulation Command Reference Terminal Emulation Command Reference C This appendix provides a summary of available TE commands for all supported terminals A keypad chart shows how to enter all characters on the TE keypad and lists bar codes for performing the same function To scan the bar code labels in this appendi
8. VTXXX and ANSI Terminal Emulation Commands To Enter Press the Keys Or Scan This Bar Code Backspace MEATA BKSP End viewport oz MODO END Find l MUET TTT FIND Home viewport 7 ULLAL TAL HOME Insert EDL orDLe UUM INS Next Screen or MUD ETT NEXT Page Down viewport UU AM TTET PGDN Page Left viewport OL OR A TA PGLT Page Right viewport or UU AANA PGRT C 11 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual VTXXX and ANSI Terminal Emulation Commands continued To Enter Press the Keys Or Scan This Bar Code eae rie AMT AVANT A l PGUP eee e AMT UNTON PREV Remove ar NUTAN UON REM Select ar AUC AT SEL C 12 Terminal Emulation Command Reference C VTXXX ANSI Additional Functions This chart lists the bar codes for additional VTXXX ANSI terminal emulation functions in alphabetical order VTXXX and ANSI Additional Functions To Enter Press the Keys Or Scan This Bar Code Accesses TE Configuration Menu EN Not supported kon ai a UT AAT ATA EXIT Changes to Character Mode Not supported Changes to Line Mode Not supported ne as UAT I DN oe UTA LF i tila Sd UA AT
9. e Generate the template to download to the T2425 terminal Configuring the 0100 Access Point The 0100 Access Point acts as a wireless bridge to provide RF communications between the TRAKKER 2425 terminal and the Model 200 Controller For help see the 0100 Access Point User s Manual Part No 062367 Note All access points that the TRAKKER 2425 terminal may communicate with and roam between must be in the same IP subnetwork To have the T2425 terminal communicate with the access point you must know the value of these parameters on the access point e RF domain e RF security identification ID optional 4 7 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 4 8 Configuring the Terminal When you install the TRAKKER 2425 terminal in a network you must configure a set of network parameters that control how the terminal communicates in the network There are two ways to configure the network parameters e Use the TRAKKER 2400 Menu System For help on configuring the network parameters see Chapter 1 Getting Started For help on the menu system see Chapter 3 Configuring the Terminal e Scan the configuration command from a Code 39 or Code 93 bar code label The configuration commands are listed alphabetically by command name in Chapter 8 Configuration Command Reference The set of network parameters you must configure depends on whether you install the terminal on the same IP subnetw
10. 8 57 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Scanner Redundancy continued Normal 4SR1 High 4SR2 8 58 Configuration Command Reference Scanner Selection Purpose Identifies the type of scanner you have connected to the TRAKKER 2425 terminal module for cabled scanners The terminal can optimize the scanning performance by using the scanner you define in this command Note The Scanner Selection configuration command is only used when a module for cabled scanners is installed on the TRAKKER 2425 terminal When you select a specific scanner other scanners may not function properly Your terminal may not work if you connect an incompatible scanner Default All compatible scanners Syntax SSdata Acceptable values for data are 0 All compatible scanners including wands 1 146x CCD scanners 2 155x laser scanners 3 151x laser scanners 4 1545 laser scanner 5 Compatible Symbol scanners with reverse polarity enabled Scan One of these bar codes 146x CCD Scanners All Compatible Scanners 5S0 155x Laser Scanners 552 1545 Laser Scanner 554 SS1 151x Laser Scanners 553 Compatible Symbol Scanners S55 8 59 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Scanner Timeout Purpose Defines the maximum length of time the scanner stays after you press the Scan button or activ
11. Current Library Status of Communications 242XU 093 What You Need to Do The Radio icon remains on No communications The T2425 terminal is not connected to the 0100 Access Point The Network Activate command is disabled or there is a problem with the radio card and it is turned off You need to enable the Network Activate command For help see Network Activate in Chapter 8 No icons appear 4 12 No communications The T2425 terminal is not connected to the 0100 Access Point Make sure the access point is turned on and operating You may also be using the terminal out of the RF range of an access point Try moving closer to an access point to re establish communications If the access point is on and you are in range you may need to configure the terminal to communicate in the network For help see Installing and Configuring the Terminal earlier in this chapter You See These Icons Operating the Terminal in a Network 4 Status of Communications What You Need to Do Fils ISKS The Connect icon blinks Partial communications The T2425 terminal is trying to establish communications with the Model 200 Controller You may need to configure the terminal to communicate with the controller For help see Installing and Configuring the Terminal earlier in this chapter If the terminal is configured you may need to configu
12. P ns jna jicatl Term ing apP 2429 mapp en network 4 22 manage ant pres pata L ation S nta tion 7 session ee Transp ort Network ink physical av Operating the Terminal in a Network 4 The TRAKKER 2425 terminal uses these protocols Layer Physical Data Link Network Transport Session and Presentation Presentation and Application Protocol 2 4 GHz radio 2 4 GHz RF protocol driver IP and ARP UDP ICMP UDP Plus TFTP TMF Description Provides spread spectrum radio signal control Provides RF media access control The default hardwired media access control MAC protocol used with TCP IP supports the Ethernet II standard The Internet Protocol IP complies with the standard outlined in RFC 791 The Address Resolution Protocol ARP complies with the standard outlined in RFC 826 The User Datagram Protocol UDP complies with the standard outlined in RFC 768 The Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP complies with the standard outlined in RFC 792 UDP Plus is an Intermec proprietary session layer protocol built on the UDP protocol The UDP Plus session layer provides these services guaranteed delivery duplicated message removal link connection and status management network error recovery congestion control device error detection Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP allows efficient file exchange between the termi
13. You can test the terminal beeper to make sure the entire beep volume range and beep frequency range are available and working correctly The Beeper Test can also help you distinguish the different beep volumes to choose a level that you can hear in your working environment Choose the Main Board Menu from the Hardware Diagnostics menu i 2 U 3 C 4 K BEEPER TEST SELECT BEEF TEST Hold down any key to stop test Frequency Up Down olume Up Down lub 39 Jam 622 CEsecl Exit Press 1 242XU 145 to test the beep frequency range The terminal will sound a series of beeps starting from a low frequency beep through the range to a high frequency beep and then back to a low frequency beep Press 2 to test the beep volume The terminal sounds a series of beeps from a quiet beep to a very loud beep Tests 3 and 4 also test the beep volume and frequency by playing a short tune If you do not hear any beeps during any of these tests you may have a problem with the beeper or internal speakers For help contact your local Intermec service representative Troubleshooting Destructive RAM Test Purpose Use the Destructive RAM Test if you are think the RAM may be bad Where Available Choose the Main Board Menu from the Hardware Diagnostics menu Sample Screen Definition CAUTION DESTRUCTIVE RAM TEST The following test Memory Test Passed will cause the u
14. alphanumeric keypad The alphanumeric keypad on the TRAKKER 2425 terminal has 56 keys to type alphabetic and numeric characters Although the keypad is smaller than a desktop terminal keyboard you use special keys on the terminal s keypad and press key combinations to access all the keys and functions ANSI American National Standards Institute A non governmental organization responsible for establishing many standards including a number of data communications and terminal standards TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual API Application programming interface A well defined interface to routines that an application can use to request and perform system level tasks application A software program or program package that makes calls to the operating system and manipulates data files allowing a user to perform a specific job ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange A standard 7 bit code usually transmitted with a parity bit for a total of 8 bits per character Contrast with EBCDIC ASCII control character One of the first 32 characters 0 through 31 in decimal representation in the ASCII character set Each of these characters has a standard control function such as backspace or carriage return audio signals The terminal has a beeper and a clicker that produce audio signals to indicate terminal status You can change the beep volume and enable or disable the keypad clicker with con
15. Each character is represented by a standalone group of three bars with two included spaces This code is not self checking One or two check digits provide data security Code 11 is most extensively used in labeling telecommunications components and equipment Its maximum density is 15 characters per inch Code 16K A two dimensional stacked rows ultra high density bar code symbology It is based on Code 128 and is used widely to label unit dose packaging for the healthcare industry Code 2 of 5 2 of 5 A discrete self checking code for encoding numeric data only The bars encode information and the spaces separate individual bars It can achieve densities of 15 characters per inch Code 39 A discrete variable length and self checking bar code symbology The character set is uppercase A to Z 0 to 9 dollar sign period slash percent space plus and minus Code 39 can be extended to the full 128 ASCII character set by use of a two character encoding scheme see full ASCII Its maximum density is 9 8 characters per inch TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Code 49 A multirow symbology for high data density The last character in each row is used for row checking and the last two characters of the symbol are used for overall checking The character set includes all 128 ASCII characters Its maximum density is 93 3 alphanumeric characters per inch or 154 3 numeric characters per
16. MINI Mtl arco Coae 39 Human readable ian interpretation The asterisks at the beginning and end of the human readable interpretation are the start and stop codes for a Code 39 bar code label If you are using a bar code printing utility it may automatically supply the asterisks as the start and stop code so that you only need to type the actual text of the command You can also create and print configuration labels and reader command labels in Code 93 which has its own start and stop codes Conventions for Software Screens and Messages This manual includes illustrations that represent how the TRAKKER 2425 terminal displays software screens and messages Here are two examples z File Name Configuration Menu Diagnostics Menu Eustem Menu About TRAKKER 2466 N Select item CEnter Next screen CFil Help LEscl Exit 242XU 007 Before You Begin Conventions for Commands This manual includes sample commands that are shown exactly as you should type them on your terminal or network device The manual also describes the syntax for many commands defining each parameter in the command This example illustrates the format conventions used for commands To send a configuration command from the Model 200 Controller use this syntax command command command n where is the Change Configuration command command is a configuration command For example BV is the command to set the Beep
17. Note You also need a main lithium ion battery pack and a battery charger to charge the main lithium ion battery pack See your Intermec sales representative for the main battery packs and battery chargers that are currently available Getting Started fi Using the Terminal for the First Time Follow these steps to start using your new TRAKKER 2425 terminal OO AN DD OF Q N e ba Unpack the terminal and documentation Charge the main battery pack ordered separately Connect the backup battery Install the charged main battery pack Charge the backup battery Configure the Model 200 Controller and 0100 Access Point Turn on the terminal Configure the terminal Start the terminal emulation or screen mapping application Verify that the terminal is operating correctly These steps are described in detail in the next sections Unpacking the Terminal When you remove the terminal from its box save the box and shipping material in case you need to ship or store the terminal Check the contents of the box against the invoice for completeness and contact your local Intermec service representative if there is a problem The shipping box contains TRAKKER 2425 hand held terminal TRAKKER 2425 Hand Held Terminal Getting Started Guide TRAKKER 2425 Manual Supplement Lithium Ion Battery Safety Instruction Information Standard range scan module or module for cabled scanners Scan module documentati
18. Set Time and Date Lets you set the current time and date For help see Setting the Time and Date in Chapter 1 Store Configuration Stores the current configuration in flash memory including any changes you have made in the menu system When you exit the TRAKKER 2400 Menu System you will also be prompted to save your changes For help see Exiting the TRAKKER 2400 Menu System later in this chapter Upgrade Firmware Lets you upgrade the system firmware on the terminal For help see Upgrading the Firmware later in this chapter Configuring the Terminal 3 You can use the keystrokes described next to move around in the TRAKKER 2400 Menu System or you can scan bar code labels For a list of bar code labels see the Full ASCII Bar Code Chart in Appendix B Selecting Menus and Commands Press A or W to choose a menu name from the Main Menu Then press 3 C or D to display the commands in the selected menu In this example you press W W _ lt to display the System Menu Note In the menu system the Q and Q keys all work the same way a MAIN MENU SYSTEM MENU Configuration Menu Load Default Values Diagnostics Menu Set Time and Date Eustem Menu Store Configuration About TRAKKER 2466 Upgrade Firmware N Select item N Select item CEnter Next screen CEnter Next screen CF11 Help CF11 Help LEscl Exit CEsc Exit 242XU 058 Press A or to choose a command or option from a menu an
19. f amp to reset the terminal and try again 6 17 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Problems Using the Screen Mapping Application There are three types of errors that you may see while running the screen mapping application on the terminal e Initialization errors that occur while trying to start the screen mapping application download the template or loading a screen e Communications errors that occur while trying to communicate with the Model 200 Controller e Data entry errors that occur while entering data in the fields on a screen If you have a problem while using your screen mapping application check these possible initialization communications or data entry problems Screen Mapping Initialization Errors Problem Solution Restart T2400 The screen mapping application did not start correctly Scan this bar code label to reset the firmware and restart the application Reset Firmware 4 Error Reading Template File You are trying to download the template file from the Model 200 Controller and a file error occurred Make sure you enter a valid template name that is currently stored on the correct directory on the controller Try requesting or downloading the template again For help see the Model 200 Controller System Manual Screen must have one input field The screen you selected has not been defined correctly An defined input screen must have at least one input
20. s UDP Plus protocol The communications protocol stack for the TRAKKER 2425 terminal is fit to the Open Systems Interconnection OSI seven layer model The illustration on the next page shows how the 2 4 GHz network maps into the OSI model The terminal applications including terminal emulation and screen mapping are on top of the protocol stack Intermec provides a terminal communications API application program interface to interface to the protocol stack The API provides a common interface to these Intermec value added protocols e Terminal Message Format TMF is used to route data and network management messages between applications on the T2425 terminal and peer tasks on the controller or host computer e UDP Plus is an Intermec protocol built on top of User Datagram Protocol UDP It maximizes the performance of wireless RF and hardwired networks e Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP allows efficient file exchange between the T2425 terminal and the Model 200 Controller e Network management provides network access to the T2425 terminal configuration status and statistics Network management uses the Terminal Message Format to receive and send messages The remaining layers in the protocol stack are a series of standard protocols that interface with the drivers and hardware needed to support the 2 4 GHz network 4 21 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual TRAKKER 2425 Terminal Protocol Stack
21. 1 27 4 13 connecting the backup battery 1 6 2 30 contrast adjusting the display 2 14 8 36 control characters bar code labels to scan B 6 full ASCII list of B 5 controller See Model 200 Controller controller IP address configuration command 8 29 configuring 1 21 defined 4 9 conventions bar codes defined xx commands defined xxi keypad defined xix screens and messages defined xx warnings and cautions defined xvi country code displayed 6 49 Ctrl key icon described 2 15 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual cursor keys using 2 9 5 32 mode configuring for VTXXX ANSI 5 21 viewport modes configuring 5 11 5 23 Cursor Home command 3270 and 5250 9 5 customizing the terminal 3 3 D Data icon blinks data transmitting 4 13 described 2 17 remains on data buffered 4 13 data accumulating in commands 7 4 8 5 decimal key code values displaying 6 50 table of ASCII characters B 3 to B 5 Decode Security command 2 42 8 31 default configuration list of 3 25 to 3 30 A 7 to A 9 reader command 7 11 restoring 3 21 6 6 default router 2 4 GHz network illustrated 4 5 configuration command 8 32 defined 4 10 determining when to configure 4 8 Delete command 3270 and 5250 9 5 density of bar code for scanning A 6 depth of field scan module A 6 Destructive RAM Test screen defined 6 47 diagnostics Access Point screen defined 6 54 Application Events s
22. 9 3 Backtab 9 4 Clear 9 4 Cursor Home 9 5 Delete 9 5 Duplicate 9 22 Index I End 9 5 Enter 9 6 Enter TE Configuration Menu 9 6 Erase Input 9 6 Erase to End of Field 9 7 Error Reset 9 7 Fast Cursor Left or Right 9 8 Field 9 9 Field 9 9 Field Exit 9 10 Field Mark 9 22 Help 9 10 Home 9 11 Insert 9 11 New Line 9 11 Paging Keys 9 12 Reset 9 13 Roll Down 9 13 Roll Up 9 13 Scroll Viewport 9 14 Status 9 15 System Request 9 15 Tab 9 16 functions additional 9 22 C 9 keypads chart for entering characters 2 10 illustrated 5 7 C 3 using 2 4 to 2 9 5 6 parameters configuring 5 8 program function keys 9 17 C 14 roll keys defined 5 35 starting 1 25 5 4 TE Configuration menu exiting 5 12 troubleshooting 6 15 to 6 17 unsupported functions 5 25 using 5 5 A ABC Codabar 8 10 About TRAKKER 2400 screen defined 3 7 access point See 0100 Access Point Access Point screen defined 6 54 accessories for the terminal 1 4 Accumulate mode using reader commands 7 4 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual additional TE functions 3270 and 5250 9 22 C 9 VTXXX ANSI 10 10 C 13 address controller IP configuring 8 29 default router configuring 8 32 IP defined 4 9 terminal IP configuring 8 64 AIAG check digit Code 39 8 18 alphanumeric keypad See keypad American Blood Commission See ABC Codabar ANSI terminal emulation ke
23. F13 10 8 VT100 220 320 and ANSI TE Command Reference 1 0 Program Function Keys continued Function Key Bar Code DE F14 F14 DE F15 F15 f F F16 F16 f G F17 F17 f H F18 F18 f F19 F19 f J F20 F20 10 9 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Additional Functions You can use the key sequences and bar codes shown next to move the viewport movement and execute additional commands on VT100 220 320 and ANSI terminals Use these commands to move the viewport one line up down right or left When you move the viewport the cursor does not move To select a specific cursor key press one of the arrows on the edges of the oval shaped Cursor key Keypad Viewport Up A Viewport Down Yv Viewport Left lt Viewport Right gt Scan Viewport Up UP Viewport Down DN Viewport Left LF Viewport Right RT 10 10 VT100 220 320 and ANSI TE Command Reference 1 0 Additional Functions continued Function Key Bar Code Description E Not supported Accesses the TE Configuration menu You can access the menu at any time during your terminal emulation session HA Exit TE This command lets you exit the terminal O D I Som
24. Fid PgUp PgLft PgRt 4 5 6 End PgDn 1 2 3 BkSp Ins Del_ gt 0 Fn FnR Enter A B Cc D E L L J J Fig gt FI7 Fig Ft9 F20 F G H 1 N F23 F22 F23 F24 1 E Eof r r S K L M N o lt NL gt Stat R R Help T Atn _E Inp X Y Ctrl EnRst TA E 242XU 015 Terminal Emulation Command Reference 3270 and 5250 TE Command Summary This chart lists the bar code labels for all 3270 and 5250 terminal emulation commands in alphabetical order 3270 and 5250 Terminal Emulation Commands To Enter Attention Backtab Clear Cursor Home Delete End viewport Enter 3270 Only Enter 5270 Only Enter TE Configuration Menu Press the Key s f x ror E Or Scan This Bar Code A A 06 N A RT BTAB ANAN UON A CLR IAA 0 m MAU RTA DEL AUC END A Ke gt lt CR gt Not supported C 5 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 3270 and 5250 Terminal Emulation Commands continued To Enter Press the Key s Or Scan This Bar Code eee UT IN IO ATA EINP Ser E Sie MUDO A EOF Repeat aie ae ULLAL E
25. This field sets the mode VT series terminals use to exchange escape sequences control commands and status reports with an application User Defined Key VT220 320 only Select whether you want this parameter set to lock or unlock When you select lock you cannot reprogram user defined keys When you select unlock you can program user defined keys from the host application Keypad Mode Select Numeric or Application mode These options generate different key codes If you select Numeric mode you generate ANSI cursor control ESC sequences that correspond to what appears on the face of the keys If you select Application mode you generate application ESC sequences for the key code For help see your VT manual Cursor Mode Select Cursor or Application mode These two options generate different key codes If you select Cursor mode you generate ANSI cursor control ESC sequences that correspond to what appears on the face of the cursor key 5 21 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual If you select Application mode you generate application ESC sequences for the key code For help see your VT manual TERMINAL Page 3 Input Mode Character Mode OK CANCEL 242XU 028 Input Mode Select Line mode or Character mode If you select Line mode you can enter a line of characters on your T2425 terminal before transmitting data to the host Press to send each line of text to
26. computer keyboards and terminal keypads Convention How to Interpret the Convention Special text Shows the command as you should enter it into the terminal See Conventions for Commands later in this chapter Italic text Indicates that you must replace the parameter with a value See Conventions for Commands later in this chapter Bold text Indicates the keys you must press on a PC or host computer keyboard For example press Enter means you press the key labeled Enter on the PC or host computer keyboard Shows the key you must press on the terminal For example press directs you to press the Enter key on the terminal keypad t C ir i 2llm Shows a series of terminal keys you must press and release in the order shown For example Press f 7 _2 m to run the TRAKKER 2400 Menu System t Shows a series of terminal keys you must press simultaneously Also you must press and hold the keys in the order shown For example Press Lf 9 to reset the terminal xix TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual XX Conventions for Bar Codes You can scan the bar codes listed in this manual to enter data or perform a command The bar code labels in this manual are printed in the Code 39 symbology Each bar code includes the name and human readable interpretation For example Change Configuration Name
27. enable with 8 20 Function Code 2 Code 49 8 20 Function Code 3 Code 49 8 20 Function keys 3270 and 5250 list of 9 17 C 14 VTXXX ANSL list of 10 7 C 14 Function Left key icon described 2 15 using 2 7 Function Right key icon described 2 15 using 2 7 functions unsupported for TE 5 25 G H green keys using 2 6 handstrap terminal accessory 1 4 Hardware Configuration screen defined 6 49 Hardware Diagnostics menu diagnostic tests defined 6 44 using 6 38 hardware features illustrated 1 3 2 3 Health Industry Bar Code See HIBC Code 39 height of text configuring 3270 and 5250 5 9 VTXXX ANSI 5 20 help 5250 TE command 9 10 TRAKKER 2400 Menu System using 3 9 hexadecimal key code values displaying 6 50 table of ASCII characters B 3 to B 5 1 10 HIBC Code 39 8 18 holster terminal accessory 1 4 Home command 3270 and 5250 9 11 VTXXX ANSI 10 4 horizontal reading angle for scanning 2 42 host application developing 4 17 to 4 20 host computer not receiving data troubleshooting 6 14 using to configure terminal 4 17 to 4 20 host name configuring 3270 and 5250 5 10 VTXXX ANSI 5 23 humidity operating and storage range A 4 l IBM 3270 terminal emulation using 5 5 See also 3270 and 5250 terminal emulation IBM 5250 terminal emulation using 5 5 See also 3270 and 5250 terminal emulation ICMP defined 4 23 icons terminal display Battery 2 17 2 34 Caps Lock 2 8 2 15
28. the alignment marks on the terminal antenna connector Retaining ring slot Retaining aa A ring opening Retaining wee a ntenna i must be in ny ee a this position 242XU 119 6 Push the new antenna onto the antenna connector until it fits flush and the opening for the retaining ring is visible 7 Insert the retaining ring into the opening 8 Push the retaining ring down until it is locked in place 9 Turn the terminal over and adjust the angle of the antenna as needed 6 33 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 6 34 Cleaning the Scan Module Window and Display To keep the T2425 terminal in good working order you need to clean the scan module window and terminal display Clean these surfaces as often as needed or when they are dirty To clean the scan module window and display 1 Press to turn off the terminal 2 Use a solution of ammonia and water 3 Dip a clean towel or rag in the ammonia solution and wring out the excess solution Wipe off the scan module window and terminal display Do not allow any abrasive material to touch these surfaces 4 Wipe dry Running Diagnostics Troubleshooting You can run diagnostics on the terminal to help analyze and fix hardware and firmware problems application problems and to view system information You use the TRAKKER 2400 Menu System to run diagnostics Use this table to determine the diagnostic you want to
29. thode d un tat ou d un rapport qui doit tre strictement respect pour viter l occurrence de mort ou de blessures graves aux personnes manupulant l quipement Caution A caution alerts you to an operating procedure practice condition or statement that must be strictly observed to prevent equipment damage or destruction or corruption or loss of data Conseil Une pr caution vous avertit d une proc dure de fonctionnement d une m thode d un tat ou d un rapport qui doit tre strictement respect pour emp cher l endommagement ou la destruction de l quipement ou l alt ration ou la perte de donn es Notes Notes are statements that either provide extra information about a topic or contain special instructions for handling a particular condition or set of circumstances Before You Begin About This Manual This manual contains all of the information necessary to install configure operate and troubleshoot the TRAKKER Antares 2425 terminal This manual was written for two audiences e All users who need to know how to use the terminal to collect data e MIS personnel operations personnel analysts and programmers who need to know how to install configure test and use the terminal to operate in a 2 4 GHz radio frequency network You should have a good knowledge of your company s network and data collection software You should be familiar with data communications and network protocols Wh
30. 11 6 12 UDP Port 8 68 UPC EAN 8 70 using 8 3 variable data entering 8 5 configuration file not found screen 1 16 1 25 Configuration Menu exiting and saving changes 3 14 options defined 3 7 problems while exiting 6 10 6 11 terminal emulation configuring 5 8 5 19 See also TE Configuration menu configuring 0100 Access Point 4 7 2 4 GHz network overview 1 14 4 6 3270 and 5250 parameters 5 8 bar code symbologies 1 30 choosing 3 4 booting the terminal on resume 6 28 Change Configuration command using 7 10 controller IP address 1 21 Default Configuration command using 7 11 default configuration restoring 3 21 6 6 default settings list of A 7 to A 9 Index I firmware upgrading 3 23 Model 200 Controller 4 7 network activate parameter 1 21 network parameters 1 17 to 1 24 defined 4 8 operating parameters described 3 5 overview of configuration parameters 3 3 recording the configuration 3 25 to 3 30 remotely over the network 4 15 RF domain 1 23 RF security ID 1 23 scanning bar code labels 3 17 summary of methods 3 3 terminal IP address 1 22 terminal from host 4 17 to 4 20 terminal from the controller 4 15 time and date 1 17 TRAKKER 2400 Menu System using 3 6 to 3 16 troubleshooting 6 10 to 6 12 VTXXX ANSI parameters 5 19 Connect icon blinks troubleshooting 1 27 4 13 6 13 6 14 described 2 16 not displayed troubleshooting 1 27 4 12 6 13 remains on for communications
31. 17 to 1 24 steps for using the terminal 1 5 TE Configuration menu 5 8 5 19 TRAKKER 2400 Menu System 3 6 turning on the terminal 1 15 Status command 3270 and 5250 9 15 status line turning on or off 5 13 Store Configuration screen using 3 20 storing the terminal batteries managing 2 26 6 26 cold temperatures guidelines 6 27 humidity range A 4 temperature range A 4 subnet mask 2 4 GHz network illustrated 4 5 configuration command 8 62 defined 4 10 determining when to configure 4 8 subnetworks terminal using across 4 4 4 5 See also network Subsystem Versions screen defined 6 55 1 15 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Suspend mode automatic shutoff using 8 7 battery power managing 2 35 described 1 29 Suspend Resume screen defined 6 56 symbologies See bar code symbologies symbols bar code labels to scan B 8 syntax configuration commands listed by A 10 System Diagnostics menu diagnostic tests defined 6 54 using 6 38 System Menu options defined 3 8 system message flag defined 4 18 System Request command 3270 and 5250 9 15 Menu 5250 TE 9 15 T Tab command 3270 and 5250 9 16 Task Status screen defined 6 43 TE See terminal emulation TE Configuration menu 3270 and 5250 Communications screen defined 5 10 Terminal screen defined 5 9 Viewport screen defined 5 10 exiting 5 12 5 24 key sequence for starting 5 8 5 19 VTXXX ANSI Communications scr
32. 2 of 5 CC000 To enable Code 2 of 5 1 Scan one of these bar codes Code 2 of 5 3 Bar Start Stop 4 CC0 Code 2 of 5 2 Bar Start Stop 4 CC1 Configuration Command Reference 2 Scan a two digit numeric value to set the label length 01 32 from these bar codes Q w2 g 4 I5 6 ETE Q 4Q 3 Scan this bar code Exit Accumulate Mode _ 8 15 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Code 39 Purpose Enables or disables decoding of Code 39 symbology Code 39 is discrete variable length and self checking The character set is uppercase A to Z 0 to 9 dollar sign period slash percent space plus and minus There are three types of ASCII the terminal decodes e Code 39 non full ASCII e Code 39 full ASCII e Code 39 mixed full ASCII Code 39 non full ASCII Non full ASCII uses a one character encoding scheme For example you encode the data SAMPLE as follows SAMPLE This label decodes as SAMPLE Code 39 full ASCII Full ASCII uses a two character encoding scheme to extend the character set to 128 characters You use the dollar sign slash percent or plus followed by an uppercase letter to represent one of the characters in the extended set You must encode lowercase letters as a plus sign followed by their uppercase equivalents For a lis
33. 54 Access Point 6 54 Subsystem Versions 6 55 Suspend Resume Test 6 56 Reader Command Reference 7 Using Reader Commands 7 3 Using Accumulate Mode 7 4 Enter Accumulate Mode 7 6 Backspace 7 6 Clear 7 6 Enter 7 7 Exit Accumulate Mode 7 7 viii Contents Operating Reader Commands 7 8 Backlight On and Off 7 9 Change Configuration 7 10 Default Configuration 7 11 Multiple Read Labels 7 12 Reset Firmware 7 13 Scanner Trigger On and Off 7 14 Test and Service Mode 7 15 Configuration Command Reference Using Configuration Commands 8 3 Configuration Commands Listed by Category 8 4 Entering Variable Data in a Configuration Command 8 5 Append Time 8 6 Automatic Shutoff 8 7 Beep Volume 8 8 Codabar 8 10 Code 11 8 12 Code 16K 8 13 Code 2 of 5 8 14 Code 39 8 16 Code 49 8 20 Code 93 8 22 Code 128 8 23 Command Processing 8 25 Controller IP Address 8 29 Decode Security 8 31 Default Router 8 32 Display Backlight Timeout 8 34 ix TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Display Contrast 8 36 Interleaved 2 of 5 8 37 Keypad Caps Lock 8 39 Keypad Clicker 8 40 MSI 8 41 Network Activate 8 43 Network Loopback 8 44 Plessey 8 45 Postamble 8 46 Preamble 8 48 Resume Execution 8 50 RF Domain 8 51 RF Security Identification 8 52 RF Wakeup On Broadcast 8 54 Scan Ahead 8 55 Scanner Mode 8 56 Scanner Redundancy 8 57 Scanner Selection 8 59 Scanner Timeout 8 60 Scanner Trigger 8 61 Subne
34. 8 66 configuring 1 17 defined 4 9 Time in Seconds command 8 67 timeout display backlight configuring 8 34 scanner configuring 8 60 TMF protocol defined 4 21 to 4 23 fields defined 4 18 terminal remotely configuring 4 17 to 4 20 TPL file requesting a template 5 28 TRAKKER 2400 Menu System ASCII control characters entering 3 12 configuring the terminal 3 6 to 3 16 default configuration restoring 3 21 Diagnostics Menu using 6 36 exiting 3 15 firmware upgrading 3 23 flash memory saving changes 3 19 menus and commands selecting 3 9 network parameters configuring 1 17 to 1 24 screens using 3 10 starting 3 6 Test and Service Mode using 7 15 TRAKKER 2425 terminal 2 4 GHz network illustrated 1 14 4 3 to 4 5 accessories list of 1 4 bar code symbologies enabling 1 30 batteries learning about 2 19 booting and resetting 6 28 to 6 30 configuring from controller 4 15 from host 4 17 to 4 20 overview 1 14 summary of methods 3 3 default configuration list of A 7 to A 9 diagnostics using 6 35 to 6 56 dimensions A 3 features described 1 3 2 3 getting started list of steps 1 5 installing overview 4 6 keypad options described 2 4 manual audience and purpose xvii memory described 2 36 network parameters configuring 4 8 network protocols defined 4 21 to 4 23 operating troubleshooting 6 6 to 6 9 physical and environmental specifications A 3 to A 6 power
35. Arrow right gt Arrow left lt q Description Moves the cursor up one row or line Moves the cursor down one row or line Moves the cursor one character to the right Moves the cursor one character to the left On the terminal emulation keypads you can use the cursor keys to move around the terminal s screen if in a screen For help see Chapt you are running a program or entering data er 5 Running Applications 2 9 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Quick Reference Keypad Chart Use this keypad chart to enter any character or function on the alphanumeric keypad For help about additional functions that are available on a TE keypad see Chapter 5 Running Applications To Enter 0 to9 atoz AtoZ backlight on off backtab beep volume Bksp backspace caps contrast ctrl cursor down cursor left cursor right cursor up enter escape F1 to F5 F6 to F10 FnL function left FnR function right resume suspend shift space 2 10 Press the Key s 0 to 9 Alto Z S A to 4 Z La g Megi Tal 1l h l 7 PV aA AD to to LAA a O WY amp To Enter tab viewport down viewport end viewport home viewport left viewport right viewport up period comma dash slash backslash V A
36. CS Configuration Set request sent from the host application Cs Configuration Set response sent from the terminal to the host configuration command is the configuration command or commands you want to set on the terminal or get the current value of from the terminal For a list of configuration commands see Chapter 8 Configuration Command Reference Operating the Terminal in a Network 4 Example 1 In the host application you want to get the current values of three configuration commands from the terminal Send this transaction from the host application CGS NABVDF Note The transaction header is not shown in this example where CG NA BV DF is a TMF Configuration Get request is the Change Configuration reader command is the Network Activate configuration command is the Beep Volume configuration command is the Display Backlight Timeout configuration command The terminal returns this transaction to the host application Cg NA1BV2DF60 where Cg is a TMF Configuration Get response is the Change Configuration reader command NA1 means the Network Activate configuration command is currently set to a value of 1 which means that the 2 4 GHz network is enabled BV2 means the Beep Volume configuration command is currently set to a value of 2 which is a normal beep volume DF60 means the Display Backlight Timeout configuration command is currently set to a value of 60 seconds 4 1
37. Error Month Error Year Error Input Length Error 6 22 Solution The validation file used for the screen is not stored on the terminal You can download the validation file from the Model 200 Controller or request the file from the terminal For help see Loading a Validation File in Chapter 5 The data entered is out of the range defined for this field Enter your data again The data entered does not match the picture defined for this input field Enter your data again The data entered was not numeric and this is a numeric field Enter your data again using only numeric data You are entering data in a Time field and entered an invalid hour Enter the time again using an hour from 0 to 23 You are entering data in a Time field and entered invalid minutes Enter the time again using minutes from 0 to 59 You are entering data in a Time field and entered invalid seconds Enter the time again using seconds from 0 to 59 You are entering data in a Date field and entered an invalid day Enter the date again using a valid day for the month You are entering data in a Date field and entered an invalid month Enter the date again with a valid month from 1 to 12 You are entering data in a Date field and entered an invalid year Enter the date again with a valid year The data entered exceeded the length defined for this field Enter your data again Troubleshooting Bar Code Labels Will Not Scan If
38. F G H 1 J N F G H l J N rot F22 F23 F24 7 E Eof _F21 F22 F233 F24 E Eof K C m N o kK fe mM N o lt NL gt Stat 2 7 lt NL gt Stat R RI Hep DMOLDIDIE Shift key Sysq Hm Clear Atn E inp is U v w x Caps p Ctrl Reset z A Te A Es Control key 242XU 015 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Configuring 3270 or 5250 TE Parameters You can configure several parameters for 3270 and 5250 terminal emulation on the TRAKKER 2425 terminal These are the TE parameters you can configure e Terminal e Communications e Viewport Configuring Terminal Emulation Screens and Options You can access the TE Configuration menu at any time during your terminal emulation session Use this procedure to configure your 3270 or 5250 terminal emulation program To configure 3270 or 5250 TE options 1 Press f to access the Terminal Emulation menu The Terminal Emulation menu appears TERMINAL EMULATION Exit TE N Eelect item CLEnter Next CF11 Help LEsc Exit 242XU 018 Note Do not choose the Exit TE option which exits the terminal emulation application If you do accidentally exit TE a warning screen appears and you will be prompted to return to the TE Configuration menu Running Applications 5 2 Choose Configure TE and press The TE Configuration menu appears TE CONFIGURATION Communications Viewpo
39. Function Left key is a special key on the keypad You use the f key to type characters or perform functions that are printed on the left side above the key When you press f the key is held in a buffer and the Function Left key icon appears on the terminal s display Once you press a key other than f the key combination is entered into the terminal and the icon disappears from the display G 11 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual G 12 Function Right key The Function Right key is a special key on the keypad You use the f key to type characters or perform functions that are printed on the right side above the key When you press f the key is held in a buffer and the Function Right key icon appears on the terminal s display Once you press a key other than fl the key combination is entered into the terminal and the icon disappears from the display HIBC Health Industry Bar Code standard A modified version of Code 39 that has 43 characters uses the modulus 43 check character and reserves some character combinations for special usage home The viewport s home position is the upper left corner of the TE or application screen host application An application running remotely on a host computer host busy The condition in which the host computer is processing a request and has not responded or has not updated the screen On a 3270 terminal the OIA shows X SYSTEM X CLOCK or X On a 5
40. IP address or the controller IP address is set to 0 x xx x or 127 x x x These are invalid addresses Set a CONT ruran Mae Ok valid IP address for the terminal and or controller updated e The terminal IP address and the controller IP address are both set to the same address Set a valid IP address for the terminal and controller e The terminal and controller are on different networks but the terminal IP address and the default router address are both set to the same address Set a valid IP address for the terminal and the default router e The terminal and controller are on different networks and the terminal is not on the same network as the default router When the terminal is on a different IP subnetwork from the controller you must set the Default Router and Subnet Mask commands Set a valid IP address for terminal controller and default router For help see Installing and Configuring the Terminal in Chapter 4 If you cannot fix the addressing problem check with your network administrator to get the IP address assigned to the terminal and the controller You configure the RF security ID and You can only set the RF security ID with the 2 4 GHz the changes do not appear to be saved network enabled The Network Activate configuration command must be configured to 2 4 GHz RF Network before you can save any changes to the RF security ID command 6 10 Troubleshooting Problems While Configuring the Termina
41. Menu configuration error 6 10 POST failed 6 8 screen mapping 6 18 to 6 22 Unable to connect to controller 6 14 Error Reset command 5250 TE 9 7 escape characters entering in screens 3 13 ethernet cabling requirements 4 6 network illustrated 4 3 to 4 5 European Article Numbering See UPC EAN command Event Group Menu using 6 40 examples remotely configuring the terminal 4 19 4 20 Exit Accumulate mode configuration commands using 8 5 reader commands using 7 7 exiting Configuration Menu 3 14 screens 3 14 TE Configuration menu 5 12 5 24 TRAKKER 2400 Menu System 3 15 F Fast Cursor Right or Left command 3270 and 5250 9 8 features described 1 3 2 3 Field command 5250 TE 9 9 Field command 5250 TE 9 9 Field Exit command 5250 TE 9 10 configuring to auto advance 5 14 Field Mark command 5250 TE 9 22 Find command VTXXX ANSI 10 4 firmware applications restarting 6 30 7 13 upgrading Boot Menu using 6 29 TRAKKER 2400 Menu System using 3 23 versions listed 6 55 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual flash memory default configuration saving 7 11 described 2 36 saving configuration changes 3 15 3 19 specifications A 5 Follow Cursor mode configuring 5 11 5 23 full ASCII bar code chart of characters B 6 to B 13 Code 39 described 8 16 table of characters B 3 to B 5 Function Code 1 Code 128 using with 8 24 Code 16K enable with 8 13 Code 49
42. New Template in Chapter 5 The template file was downloaded from the controller but the terminal could not open the template file The template file on the terminal is corrupted Try requesting or downloading the template again For help see Requesting a New Template in Chapter 5 The template file was downloaded from the controller but no screen items are defined in the template Check the template on the controller and make sure you have defined screens The template file on the terminal is corrupted Try requesting or downloading the template again For help see Requesting a New Template in Chapter 5 The template file was downloaded from the controller but there was a problem reading the screens in the template The template file on the terminal is corrupted Try requesting or downloading the template again For help see Requesting a New Template in Chapter 5 6 19 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Screen Mapping Initialization Errors continued Problem Solution Link List error Program exiting The template file was downloaded from the controller but there was a problem The template file on the terminal is corrupted Try requesting or downloading the template again For help see Requesting a New Template in Chapter 5 Build screen error The template file was downloaded from the controller but there was a problem building the screens The template file on the te
43. Plus protocol Bar Code Symbologies e Codabar e Code 93 e Code 1 see Note e Code 128 e Code 11 e Interleaved 2 of 5 e Code 16K e MSI e Code 2 of 5 e PDF 417 see Note e Code 39 e Plessey e Code 49 e UPC EAN Note The Code 1 and PDF 417 symbologies are supported when you use the module for cabled scanners with the JANUS 7010 hand held imager You configure Code 1 and PDF 417 on the J7010 imager For help see the JANUS 7010 Hand Held Imager User s Manual P N 060523 A 5 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual A 6 Scan Module Options There are two scan module accessory options e Standard range scan module with integrated visible laser diode 670 nm e Module for cabled scanners Standard Range Scan Module Optical Parameters The depth of field specifications are Bar Code Specification Depth of Field Scanning Range 5 0 mil code 5 to 7 inches 7 5 mil code 5 to 11 inches 10 mil code 4 to 15 inches 15 mil code 4 to 21 inches 20 mil code 4 to 24 inches 40 mil code 5 to 28 inches 55 mil code 6 to 30 inches 55 mil code retroreflective 2 to 7 inches 100 mil code retroreflective 3 to 13 inches Input Devices for the Module for Cabled Scanners You can attach these input devices to the module for cabled scanners e Intermec 146x CCD scanners e Intermec 151x 1545 and 155x laser scanners e Intermec 126X and 127X wands e JANUS 7010 hand held imager e Compatible Symbol scanners with revers
44. Router NX Configuration Command Reference 2 Scan a numeric value from 0 to 255 to set an n field of the default router address from these bar codes HL Q Pad g 4 I5 6 ETE Q 4Q 3 Scan this bar code Period 4 Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to set the next two numbers in the default router address field After you scan the last address segment go to Step 5 Do not scan the period after the last address segment 5 Scan this bar code Exit Accumulate Mode _ 8 33 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Display Backlight Timeout Purpose Default Syntax Scan Or 8 34 Defines the amount of time the backlight remains on The backlight timeout setting significantly affects the terminal s battery life If you set a longer backlight timeout value you will use the power in the main battery pack at a faster rate 10 seconds DFdata Acceptable values for data are 00 Disabled 01 60 Timeout in seconds To disable the backlight timeout scan this bar code Disable Backlight Timeout DF00 To set the backlight timeout 1 Scan this bar code Enter Accumulate Mode Set Backlight Timeout DF 2 Scan a two digit numeric value for data from these bar codes Q gt wae 43 4 6 Q 3 Scan this bar code Exit Accumulate Mode _
45. TRAKKER 2400 Menu System earlier in this chapter 3 22 Configuring the Terminal Upgrading the Firmware The terminal firmware includes these items e TRAKKER 2400 Menu System e Terminal emulation or screen mapping application e TE Configuration Menu e Operating environment firmware and drivers When a new release of the firmware is available your local Intermec service representative can upgrade the firmware on the TRAKKER 2425 terminal For help contact your local Intermec service representative To upgrade the firmware 1 Press 7 2 m or scan this bar code Enter Test and Service Mode _ The Main Menu appears 2 Choose System Menu and press The System Menu appears et Time and Date tore Configuration Upgrade Firmware N Select item CEnter Next screen CFil Help CEse Exit 242XU 051 3 23 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 3 Choose the Upgrade Firmware command and press The Upgrade Firmware screen appears UPGRADE FIRMWARE Upgrade terminal firmware Make sure the terminal is connected to a host computer through the optical adapter OK CANCEL 242XU 074 4 To exit without upgrading choose Cancel The System Menu appears Press to exit the System Menu The Main Menu appears If you are upgrading the firmware with your local Intermec se
46. Task Status Description Tests the radio to make sure it is working Verifies that the hardware for the RS 232 port is functioning correctly Tests the laser scanner to make sure it is working Lists the version of each major software subsystem loaded on the terminal Tests the terminal memory to make sure the memory is being preserved through a suspend and resume cycle Shows the task base address the percentage of time each subsystem has been running and the stack usage Note There are two additional diagnostics available from the Software Diagnostics Event Group Menu The two diagnostics Network Events and Network Applications will be defined in a future release Running Diagnostics From the Menu System The TRAKKER 2400 Menu System is a menu driven application that lets you configure the terminal view system information and run diagnostics You can access the TRAKKER 2400 Menu System and run diagnostics while running any application To run diagnostics from the TRAKKER 2400 Menu System 1 Press A T 2 M or scan this bar code Note You must press the Left Enter key in this key sequence not the D Right Enter or keys Troubleshooting Enter Test and Service Mode _ The Main Menu appears Diagnostics Menu Eustem Menu About TRAKKER 24606 N Eelect item CEnter Next screen CF11 Help LEsc l Exit 242XU 001 2 Press W to choose
47. Volume on the terminal Enter the command BVO to turn off the beep volume You can include multiple configuration command parameters in the command to configure the terminal This table defines the conventions used in the example Convention Description Special font Commands appear in this font You enter the command exactly as it is shown Italic text Italics indicate a variable which you must replace with a real value such as a number filename keyword or command Brackets enclose a parameter that you may omit from the command Do not include the brackets in the command Required If a parameter is not enclosed in brackets the parameter is parameters required You must include the parameter in the command otherwise the command will not execute correctly where This word introduces a list of the command s parameters and explains the values you can specify for them xxi TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual xxii Other Intermec Manuals You may need to refer to the manuals listed below for additional information about your TRAKKER 2425 terminal or 2 4 GHz radio frequency network To order additional manuals contact your local Intermec representative or distributor Manual 0100 Access Point User s Manual The Bar Code Book Model 200 Controller System Manual Model 200 Controller Technical Reference Manual TRAKKER 2400 Series Application Development Tools System Manual TRAKKE
48. Works The viewport lets you view screens and enter data by showing the part of the screen you are using When you need to view part of a screen that does not appear on the display you can move the viewport to show that part of the screen The viewport acts as a window to the larger screen and it behaves as if it were moving across the screen There are two ways to move the viewport e Manually e Automatically To manually move the viewport you use the viewport cursor keys and paging keys In 5250 TE you can also use the roll up or roll down keys To automatically move the viewport you use a 3270 5250 or VIXXX ANSI TE application and configure the Viewport mode Even if the viewport automatically follows or centers the cursor in a TE screen you can still manually move the viewport around the 25 x 80 TE screen to see other information Note To scan the bar code labels in this section you must configure the terminal to use Code 39 in Full ASCII mode For help see Code 39 in Chapter 8 Running Applications 5 Using the Viewport 16 x 20 terminal display m Full 25 x 80 screen Next Screen Qs ATI Fid Ex Fld Exit t Fio Ma Seo COGOP 7 8 9 Move viewport 7 8 9 LJ Ld E with the cursor and with the ae up and 1 2 3 a
49. a terminal template that is downloaded to the terminal Script files that you build on the controller allow the transaction fields from the terminal screens to be mapped to different host screen fields TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Starting Your Application Make sure you have installed the terminal in your 2 4 GHz network For help see Chapter 1 Getting Started If you have already completed these tasks you can start your application To start your application 1 Press the 9 key to turn on the terminal 2 Wait a few seconds while the display clears and the application starts Once the display on the T2425 shows the sign on screen you are ready to use your terminal For screen mapping you may also see the template menu if a template has been downloaded from the controller 3270 5250 Sign On Screen VTXXX ANSI Login Screen Screen Mapping Screen Password User Program procedure Menu 5 Current Library lt login File Name 242XU 014 Note If your application does not start after a few seconds you may not have configured the T2425 correctly For help see Chapter 1 Getting Started Now that you have started your application you need to learn how to use it For help turn to these sections e Using 3270 and 5250 Terminal Emulation on page 5 5 e Using VT100 220 320 or ANSI Termin
50. and numeric only fields Field inserts a minus sign in the last position of a signed numeric field Keypad Field f _ 8 Field f 8 Scan Field AMI AU AA TA FLD Field FLD 9 9 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 9 10 Field Exit 5250 terminals only This command exits an input field and moves the cursor to the beginning of the next input field If you press this key while the cursor is between characters then all characters to the right of the cursor will be erased Note You can set the Postamble or Preamble command to use characters from the extended ASCII character set such as the Field Exit code for 5250 TE For help see Auto Advancing Through Fields on 5250 TE Screens in Chapter 5 Keypad Cor Scan Field Exit FLDX Help 5250 terminals only Help causes the host system to display the Help Menu if a local processing error has not occurred If a local processing error occurs the error condition is handled automatically by the TE application For help on TE application error messages see Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Keypad f 7 Scan Help HELP 3270 and 5250 TE Command Reference Home Moves the viewport to the top left corner of the TE application screen When you move the viewport the cursor does not move Keypad tL Scan Home IMNON UNI HOME Insert This
51. blinks when the backup battery charge is low e The Battery icon blinks and the terminal beeps every 15 seconds when both batteries are low The Battery icon disappears when you replace or charge the main battery pack or charge the backup battery For help with the batteries see Learning About the Terminal s Batteries later in this chapter Viewport This icon appears when you move the viewport out of the upper left corner of the display which is the viewport s home position When you move the viewport back to the home position the icon disappears TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Understanding the Terminal s Audio Signals speakers to sound audio signals or beep sequences as you use the A The TRAKKER 2425 terminal and scan module have a beeper and internal terminal For example you hear a low beep tone each time you enter or scan a valid command You can change the beep volume to meet the needs of your working environment For example use a quiet beep in a library or a loud beep in a manufacturing plant There are two ways to change the beep volume e Use the Backlight key press f G7 on the keypad For help see Adjusting the Display From the Keypad earlier in this chapter e Use the Beep Volume command For help see Beep Volume in Chapter 8 The next table explains the purpose of each beep sequence you may hear Beep Sequence Low beep High beep Three low be
52. changes 3 19 specifications A 5 suspend resume testing 6 56 troubleshooting 6 47 Menu System See TRAKKER 2400 Menu System menus Configuration Menu defined 3 7 Diagnostics Menu defined 6 38 Main Menu defined 3 6 System Menu defined 3 8 TE Configuration using 5 9 5 20 TRAKKER 2400 Menu System selecting 3 9 messages conventions defined xx status line described 5 13 mixed full ASCII Code 39 8 17 Model 200 Controller configuring 4 7 host name configuring for terminal 5 10 5 23 transaction ID creating 4 17 using to configure terminal 4 15 verifying network communications 1 27 module for cabled scanners input devices configuring 8 59 list of A 6 installing 2 38 specifications A 6 terminal accessory described 1 4 troubleshooting 6 23 to 6 25 6 53 using 2 37 See also scan module or scanning moving the viewport modes described 5 11 5 23 MSI command 8 41 Multiple Read Labels reader command 7 12 I 12 N network communications activating the 2 4 GHz network 1 21 8 43 configuration commands list of 8 4 controller IP address configuring 8 29 default router configuring 8 32 RF domain configuring 8 51 RF security ID configuring 8 52 subnet mask configuring 8 62 terminal IP address configuring 8 64 troubleshooting 1 26 6 13 UDP port configuring 8 68 equipment required for 2 4 GHz 4 6 illustrated 4 3 to 4 5 installing overview 1 14 4 6 parameters defined 4 8 pro
53. chapter To verify that the terminal is communicating with the Model 200 Controller 1 If the terminal is not on press to turn it on 2 Look at the top line of the terminal s display If the Connect icon shown in the illustration appears and remains on solid the terminal is communicating with the controller The terminal can send and receive data to the access point and controller 242XU 109 1 27 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual If the Connect icon blinks or is not on you need to check the network configuration For help see Configuring the Controller and Access Point or Configuring the Terminal earlier in this chapter Note The Connect icon is not instantaneously updated but does tell you the communications status the last time data was sent or received from the terminal To verify that the application is running 1 Ifthe terminal is not on press 9 to turn it on The login or initial screen for your application should appear 3270 5250 Sign On Screen VTXXX ANSI Login Screen Screen Mapping Screen User Sian on tlogin Eite Name Password 2 eae Program procedure Menu eee Current Library 242XU 014 2 Use the keypad to type data in a field or use the scan module to scan bar code labels To learn more about using the terminal s keypad and display see Chapter 2 Learnin
54. command puts the keypad into Insert mode Insert mode lets you insert characters between other characters in a field If you insert characters after the field is full enter data at a field attribute or in a protected field the keypad locks up If you press any key that initiates host communication such as you turn off Insert mode and unlock the keypad The status line indicates when the terminal is operating in Insert mode Keypad fLo Scan Insert MMD DNT INS New Line Use this command to move the cursor to the first unprotected character position of the first line in the display If the entire display is a protected field the cursor returns to the home position Keypad t P Scan New Line NL 9 11 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 9 12 Paging Keys Viewport Paging keys move the T2425 display to the next adjacent area on the screen These keys move the display as a viewport within the host terminal screen the screen itself does not advance or scroll The paging keys let you view the rest of the screen without entering data When you page you move only the viewport not the cursor and the cursor may disappear from the display A page is 16 lines by 20 characters The Cursor Home key will bring both the viewport and the cursor back to the first field position on the screen Keypad Page Up tjl 2 Page Down
55. communications using to monitor 4 12 Connect 2 16 Ctrl 2 15 Data 2 17 Function Left 2 7 2 15 Function Right 2 7 2 15 Radio 2 16 Shift 2 7 2 15 troubleshooting 1 26 6 13 Viewport 2 12 2 17 input devices configuring for scan module 8 59 list for scan module A 6 troubleshooting 6 23 to 6 25 Input mode configuring for VTXXX ANSI 5 22 10 11 Insert command 3270 and 5250 9 11 VTXXX ANSI 10 4 installing 0100 Access Point 4 7 2 4 GHz network overview 1 14 4 3 to 4 5 backup battery 1 6 2 30 battery pack 1 9 2 22 Model 200 Controller 4 7 network overview 4 6 scan module 2 38 interface cable connecting to scan module 6 24 Interleaved 2 of 5 command 8 37 disabled with Code 2 of 5 8 14 Intermec support services xv IP address See address J K JANUS 7010 imager configuring for scan module 6 24 A 6 key W W using 2 13 t using 2 7 t using 2 7 9 using 2 7 conventions defined xix cursor using 2 9 5 32 paging using 5 33 3270 and 5250 list of 9 12 VTXXX ANSI list of 10 5 program attention for 3270 TE 9 21 program function list of C 14 3270 and 5250 9 17 VTXXX ANSI 10 7 roll using for 5250 TE 5 35 Scan button using 2 40 special keys finding 2 4 user defined configuring for VTXXX ANSI 5 21 keypad key described 1 29 key using 2 13 _t key using 2 7 f key using 2 7 key using 2 7 3270 and 5250 illustrated 5 7 C 3 using 5 6 Ind
56. configuration 6 54 Troubleshooting Subsystem Versions Purpose If you are discussing a problem with Intermec you can use the Subsystem Versions screen to tell the Intermec representative the exact version of software subsystems loaded on the terminal Where Available System Diagnostics menu Sample Screen SUBSYSTEM VERS TONS Name Version Network 80112 RF Driver 80112 Decodes 800111 Scanner 660111 Hdr Cmd Proc B8 0112 Term Serv 880109 Lahel Task 666112 TE App 800116 Display 8600111 Menu Sustem 80112 CEnter Next screen CEsecl Exit 242XU 136 Definition Press to display the next screen of subsystem information If you are having a specific problem with one system note the version loaded on the terminal before contacting your local Intermec service representative 6 55 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Suspend Resume Test Purpose Use the Suspend Resume Test to test the terminal memory and make sure the memory is being preserved through a suspend and resume cycle Where Available System Diagnostics menu Sample Screen Definition 6 56 CAUTION SUS PEND RESUME TEST Press ENTER to start After first heep Press I The unit suspends Hait minimum 1 min Press I O to resume Unit will heep Results are displayed CEnter Execute test CEsel Exit 242XU 140 Press to start the test The terminal performs a checksum for each 64K
57. described in detail in this chapter Using the TRAKKER 2400 Menu System With menus and dialog boxes the TRAKKER 2400 Menu System lets you view the current configuration and modify configuration parameters Configuring the terminal by scanning bar codes You can change the terminal s current configuration by scanning Code 39 or Code 93 bar code labels that contain configuration commands This is a fast easy way to change the terminal s configuration You can scan the bar code labels in this manual or you can create your own bar code labels Note You can also configure the terminal over the network from the Model 200 Controller or the host computer For help see Configuring the Terminal Over the Network in Chapter 4 Learning About Configuration Parameters You can customize many operating characteristics of the TRAKKER 2425 terminal such as the volume of its audio signals and the bar code symbologies it decodes These characteristics are controlled by configuration parameters The values you set for the configuration parameters determine how the terminal operates By customizing the terminal s configuration you can set up the terminal to operate easily and efficiently within your data collection system Note To learn the purpose and syntax of each configuration parameter or command see Chapter 8 Configuration Command Reference The commands are listed alphabetically 3 3 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Termi
58. determined by the application you use with your system See your application user s manual for details on the functions Program function keys are AID keys and the keypad remains locked while the terminal performs the function you chose Program Function Keys Function Key Bar Code EN Fi F1 F2 F2 F3 F3 F4 F4 O F5 F5 F6 oF6 9 17 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Program Function Keys continued Function Key Bar Code Ie F UNO NN F7 F8 F8 F9 F9 DO F10 F10 GATA F11 F11 DE F12 F12 f F13 F13 9 18 3270 and 5250 TE Command Reference Program Function Keys continued Function Key Bar Code DE F14 F14 ile F15 F15 f F F16 F16 l f G F17 F17 f H F18 F18 f 4 F19 F19 9 19 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Program Function Keys continued 9 20 Function Key f J f Bar Code F20 oF20 F21 F21 F22 F22 F23 F23 F24 F2
59. end of the terminal to lock the door in place Battery door 242XU 088 Note If the battery door will not shut the battery pack is not correctly installed Repeat Steps 1 through 5 above to install the battery pack Charging the Main Battery Pack You can recharge the main battery pack using the accessory battery charger The battery charger uses a charging method that maximizes battery life To charge the main battery pack e Place the battery pack in an empty slot in the battery charger Charge it for a minimum of 2 hours to fully charge the battery pack For help see the documentation that came with your battery charger Tip Keep a spare charged main battery pack on hand to operate the terminal without interruption 2 25 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 2 26 Backup Battery The backup battery is a NiCad battery that is designed to back up all memory and the real time clock while you remove a discharged main battery pack and insert a charged battery pack You can remove and replace the backup battery if it will no longer hold a charge or if the battery is dead The main battery pack charges the backup battery when required with the terminal turned on or off You should keep a charged main battery pack installed in the terminal to maximize the backup battery s life The backup battery will provide backup battery power for e A maximum of 1 month if a fully charged main battery pack is
60. field defined You need to fix the template and the screen definition on the controller and download a new template Required Fields Not Complete You skipped at least one required field You must enter data in each required field on the screen Make sure you have entered data in every required field to continue 6 18 Troubleshooting Screen Mapping Initialization Errors continued Problem Error building list from template file No menu items defined in Template Template file error reading menu Could not open Template file There are no Screen items defined in Template Error reading Screens in Template file Solution The template file was downloaded from the controller but there was a problem building the list of screens The template file on the terminal is corrupted Try requesting or downloading the template again For help see Requesting a New Template in Chapter 5 The template file was downloaded from the controller but either no menu items were defined in the template or there is a problem reading the template The template file on the terminal is corrupted Try requesting or downloading the template again For help see Requesting a New Template in Chapter 5 The template file was downloaded from the controller but there was a problem reading the menu The template file on the terminal is corrupted Try requesting or downloading the template again For help see Requesting a
61. fields from the TRAKKER 2425 terminal to the host application screens Glossary G serial A communications scheme in which the bits of a byte are transferred one at a time Often serial transmission is used to link host computers to terminals and PCs to printers server A computer that is configured to provide services to the network session A single runtime copy of a 3270 or 5250 terminal emulator through which a host application can be accessed SNA System Network Architecture The IBM architecture for supporting computer communications between dissimilar systems software Coded instructions that direct the operation of a computer A set of such instructions for accomplishing a particular task is referred to as a program Contrast with firmware Spread spectrum A radio data transmission modulation technique by which the transmitted signal is spread over a bandwidth wider than the information bandwidth start stop code or character A special bar code character that provides the scanner with start and stop reading instructions as well as a scanning direction indicator The start character is normally at the left hand end of a horizontally oriented symbol bar code label The stop character is normally at the right hand end of a horizontally oriented symbol For Code 39 the asterisk character is used store and forward A method where messages are temporarily stored in the Model 200 Controller before they a
62. have entered more characters than allowed in a field Press t to reset the terminal Enter your data again using fewer characters You have entered an invalid character in a numeric only field Reenter a valid character for this type of field The command received from the host computer contained an invalid parameter Try to establish a host connection later by selecting Exit Config from the TE Configuration menu You are attempting to enter data in a protected region of the screen Press f to reset the terminal The host computer was unable to process your Roll Down request Press t amp to reset the terminal and try again Troubleshooting Problems Using Terminal Emulation Applications continued Error Message Solution Roll Up Not Processed The host computer was unable to process your Roll Up 5250 error request Press t amp to reset the terminal and try again Session ended This message indicates a fatal error Record the controller primary and secondary return codes and contact your network administrator Wait a few minutes and try to connect again by selecting Exit Config from the TE Configuration menu Signed Numeric Only You have entered an invalid character in a signed numeric 5250 error field Reenter a valid character for this type of field SysRq Not Processed The host computer was unable to process your System 5250 error Request Press
63. is 0 to 9 plus additional symbols Similar to Plessey code multiple read label A bar code label that has a space as the first character after the start code The terminal stores a multiple read label in the buffer until you execute a command to transmit the label or scan a regular label Contrast with regular label NAU Network addressable unit A network address that allows a device to communicate with IBM hosts in a 3270 network network A collection of devices that can store and manipulate electronic data interconnected in such a way that their users can store retrieve and share information with each other network administrator The person who is responsible for the installation management and control of a network network interface card NIC An adapter card that is installed in the Model 200 Controller that allows it to connect to a network for example Ethernet Token Ring Twinaxial The card contains both the hardware to accommodate the cables and the software to use the network s protocols The NIC is also called a network adapter card G 15 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual G 16 network node An end point in a network to which or from which data can be routed Usually this is a workstation or host computer NiCad backup battery The terminal contains a rechargeable NiCad backup battery that is designed to back up all memory and the real time clock while you change the li
64. label in one pass e The angle you are scanning the bar code label may not be working well or you may be scanning the label straight on Try scanning the bar code label again but vary the scanning angle e The bar code label print quality may be poor or unreadable To check the quality of the bar code label try scanning a bar code label that you know scans Compare the two bar code labels to see if the bar code quality is too low You may need to replace the label that you cannot scan e Make sure the bar code symbology you are scanning is enabled Use the TRAKKER 2400 Menu System to check the symbologies On the Symbologies Menu each symbology that is enabled has an asterisk next to the name of the symbology If your bar code symbology is disabled enable it and then try scanning the bar code label again 6 24 Troubleshooting Bar Code Labels Will Not Scan continued Problem Solution The input device connected to the Try setting the Scanner Selection command to the specific module for cabled scanners does not input device you have attached Check the bar code appear to work well or read bar code symbologies you have enabled on the terminal Enable only labels very quickly the symbologies that you are using The standard range scan module does The standard range scan module window may be dirty not read the bar code labels quickly or Clean the scanning window of the scan module with a the scanning beam seem
65. list of 10 7 C 14 starting 1 25 5 4 TE Configuration menu exiting 5 24 terminal mode configuring 5 21 unsupported functions 5 25 using 5 16 viewport scroll commands 10 10 W wands configuring for scan module 8 59 list for scan module A 6 warnings defined xvi warranty information xv weight of the terminal A 3 white keys using 2 6
66. may automatically supply the asterisks as the start stop code 8 3 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Configuration Commands Listed by Category 8 4 This chapter lists the configuration commands in alphabetical order Use this next list to find the configuration commands you may need to set for bar code symbologies network communications and operations Bar Code Symbologies Codabar 8 10 Code 11 8 12 Code 16K 8 13 Code 2 of 5 8 14 Code 39 8 16 Code 49 8 20 Code 93 8 22 Code 128 8 23 Interleaved 2 of 5 8 37 MSI 8 41 Plessey 8 45 UPC EAN 8 70 Network Communications Controller IP Address 8 29 Default Router 8 32 Network Activate 8 43 Network Loopback 8 44 RF Domain 8 51 RF Security Identification 8 52 RF Wakeup On Broadcast 8 54 Subnet Mask 8 62 Terminal IP Address 8 64 UDP Port 8 68 Operations Append Time 8 6 Automatic Shutoff 8 7 Beep Volume 8 8 Command Processing 8 25 Decode Security 8 31 Display Backlight Timeout 8 34 Display Contrast 8 36 Keypad Caps Lock 8 39 Keypad Clicker 8 40 Postamble 8 46 Preamble 8 48 Resume Execution 8 50 Scan Ahead 8 55 Scanner Mode 8 56 Scanner Redundancy 8 57 Scanner Selection 8 59 Scanner Timeout 8 60 Scanner Trigger 8 61 Time and Date 8 66 Time in Seconds 8 67 Configuration Command Reference Entering Variable Data in a Configuration Command You can enter variable data for many of the c
67. po po n po a a en p CEsec Exit ATIME CEnter Next screen 2TH oa BG P 2TH 14 2TH BG 89 P 2TH Tx ax an ax ix SLOT STACK E D Oo s O ON wes D 5 a D D ee E p UNUSED 201 6797 LEnter Next screen LEsc Exit 242XU 131 The Time field measures the relative amount of time that a given software task or component is active For example Standby mode in the Power Management software is a component The Time that Standby mode is active is directly proportional to battery life To refresh the statistics and start from a known point in time use the Clear Task Profile diagnostic option to clear the task status counters 6 43 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Defining the Hardware Diagnostics Screens Each hardware diagnostic screen is defined in this section Battery Monitor Purpose Where Available Sample Screen Definition 6 44 Use the Battery Monitor screen to get information from the battery monitor processor about the main lithium ion battery pack You can use the temperature information to make sure you are using the terminal within the operating temperature range Choose the Main Board Menu from the Hardware Diagnostics menu BATTERY MONITOR Battery Volts 8 225 U E Battery Temperature 250 LAG Charging NO FIC Rev 7 LEsc l Exit 242XU 006 The screen displa
68. security ID can be from 1 to 20 characters 3 Scan this bar code Exit Accumulate Mode _ If you view the RF security ID in the TRAKKER 2400 Menu System the actual security ID does not display on the screen The words ID unchanged indicate that the password has not been changed in the current menu session If you change the security ID you see the new password until you exit the Configuration Menu and update the runtime configuration You want to set the security ID to the letters ABC Scan this bar code label Set RF Security ID to ABC RSABC 8 53 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual RF Wakeup On Broadcast Purpose Default Syntax Scan 8 54 Determines if the terminal can receive broadcast messages sent from the network If the wakeup on broadcast is enabled the terminal radio will turn on to receive broadcast messages If this command is disabled the terminal radio will ignore broadcast messages Power Management Tip If your network has many broadcast messages you may want to disable the wakeup on broadcast command to preserve the main battery pack s power Disabled RBdata Acceptable values for data are 0 Disabled 1 Enabled One of these bar codes Disable RF Wakeup On Broadcast RBO Enable RF Wakeup On Broadcast RB1 Configuration Command Reference 8 Scan Ahead Purpose Default Syntax Scan Enable
69. terminal Using Configuration Commands A configuration command changes the way the terminal operates For example you can change the Beep Volume and make the terminal beep very loud in a noisy environment You can execute configuration commands by e scanning a command from a Code 39 or Code 93 bar code label e choosing a command from the TRAKKER 2400 Menu System e sending a command from a device on the 2 4 GHz network such as the Model 200 Controller or a host computer Note If you are working in the TRAKKER 2400 Menu System you cannot scan configuration commands Exit the menu system to scan configuration commands You can find the following information about each configuration command in this chapter e Command description and purpose e Default setting e Command syntax and options e Bar code labels you can scan to set or change each command The configuration commands are listed alphabetically by command name For a list of bar code symbology network communications or operations commands use the next table Configuration Commands Listed by Category If you want to look up a command by its syntax see the Configuration Commands by Syntax list in Appendix A Note The Code 39 bar code labels in this chapter show an asterisk at the beginning and end of the human readable interpretation to represent the start and stop codes If you are creating your own Code 39 bar code labels your bar code printing utility
70. twork Advanced Network RF Driver N Eelect item CEnter Next screen CFil Help CEse Exit 242XU 011 3 Press to choose the Primary Network command The Primary Network screen appears PRIMARY NETHORK Activate Disabled Controller IP Addr 6 6 6 8 Terminal IP Address 6 6 6 6 OK CANCEL 242XU 012 4 Inthe Activate field press P to toggle the field and display the 2 4 GHz RF option and activate radio frequency network communications Press to move to the next field 5 In the Controller IP Address field type in the IP address for the Model 200 Controller in your network 1 21 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 1 22 The address field consists of four separate numbers Each number in the field is separated by a period and can be a number from 0 to 255 Type the address in the format nnn nnn nnn nnn and then press W For example if your Controller IP address is 192 100 100 2 type 1 2 2 1 O o 1 0 O 2 Note The network cannot be activated if the first address segment in the IP address is set to 0 127 or a number greater than 223 In the Terminal IP Address field type in the terminal s IP address The IP address must match the address set on the controller The address field consists of four separate numbers Each nu
71. wavelength determined by its chemical composition LEDs are often used as the light source in bar code readers and terminals level triggering A scanner trigger configuration that makes the laser turn on after you activate the scanner and stay on until you release the Scan button or the trigger on a cabled scanner Contrast with edge triggering lithium ion battery pack Provides the main power source to operate the terminal The lithium ion battery pack is rechargeable and charges the backup battery when required local editing error An error that occurs when a user performs an operation in a field that is not supported by the field s properties or definition No data is sent when a local editing error occurs For example a local editing error occurs when a user enters characters in a numeric only field logical partition A logically distinct portion of memory or a storage device that functions as though it were a physically separate unit Glossary G Model 200 Controller A network controller that connects Intermec s wired and wireless products to your local area network or directly to a host computer Modulus 43 check character Check character derivation method for Code 39 MSI code MSI code includes a start pattern data characters one or two check digits and a stop pattern It is fixed length continuous and non self checking This code is used to mark retail shelves for inventory reordering The character set
72. 00 Menu System to configure a preamble or postamble From the Main Menu choose Configuration Menu 3 From the Configuration Menu choose Terminal Menu 4 From the Terminal Menu choose Preamble Postamble PREAMBLE POS TAMBLE Preamble Postamble ED BA OK CANCEL 242XU 057 5 Move the cursor to the field for the preamble or postamble 3 12 Configuring the Terminal 3 6 Type the control character or escape character sequence in the preamble or postamble field e To type a control character in the preamble or postamble field use this syntax xhh where hh is the one or two digit hexadecimal number for the ASCII control character For example to enter ETX as a preamble type x03 e To type an escape character backslash in the preamble or postamble field use the next table The application ignores the first backslash character and saves the next character s For example Enter These Characters Preamble Postamble Saved X h h x x k k no data 7 Press or choose OK to save your changes and exit the screen 8 Choose another menu from the Terminal Menu or press to exit The Configuration Menu appears For help exiting the menu system see Exiting the Configuration Menu later in this chapter 3 13 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Exiting Screens and Saving Changes When you exit a screen y
73. 110011 01110100 01110101 01110110 01110111 01111000 01111001 01111010 01111011 01111100 01111101 01111110 01111111 Hex 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 7A 7B 7C 7D 7E 7F Dec 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 P Q R S T7 Char UET SN Se OS REO O Re at OQ SO Bas OA D 5 Full ASCII Charts Full ASCII Control Characters Table Control Character Definition NUL Null or all zeroes SOH Start of Heading STX Start of Text ETX End of Text EOT End of Transmission ENQ Enquiry ACK Acknowledgment BEL Bell BS Backspace HT Horizontal Tab LF Line Feed VT Vertical Tab FF Form Feed CR Carriage Return SO Shift Out SI Shift In DLE Data Link Escape Control Character DC1 DC2 DC3 DC4 NAK SYN ETB CAN EM SUB ESC FS GS RS US SP DEL Definition Device Control 1 XON Device Control 2 Device Control 3 XOFF Device Control Negative Acknowledge Synchronous Idle End Transmission Block Cancel End of Medium Substitute Escape File Separator Group Separator Record Separator Unit Separator Space Delete TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Full ASCII Bar Code Chart The charts in this section list the Code 39 bar code label f
74. 128 and is used widely to label unit dose packaging for the healthcare industry Code 16K Default Disabled Syntax CPdata Acceptable values for data are 0 Disabled 1 Standard Code 16K enabled 2 Code 16K enabled with Function Code 1 When you enable Code 16K with Function Code 1 the terminal decodes the bar code label and checks for a Function Code 1 in the first data character position If a Function Code 1 is the first character the terminal substitutes this Code 16K symbology identifier string for the Function Code 1 character K1 Scan One of these bar codes Disable Code 16K CP0 Standard Code 16K Enabled CP1 Code 16K Enabled With Function Code 1 CP2 8 13 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Code 2 of 5 Purpose Default Syntax Scan Or 8 14 Enables or disables decoding of Code 2 of 5 symbology Code 2 of 5 uses the bars to encode information and the spaces to separate the individual bars This code is discrete and self checking You can only enable Code 2 of 5 if the Interleaved 2 of 5 I 2 of 5 code is disabled If you enable I 2 of 5 Code 2 of 5 is automatically disabled Disabled CCdata where data consists of three digits as follows First digit 0 Code 2 of 5 3 Bar Start Stop 1 Code 2 of 5 2 Bar Start Stop Secondand 00 Disable Code 2 of 5 third digits 01 32 Label Length To disable Code 2 of 5 scan this bar code Disable Code
75. 250 terminal the OIA shows TI Input Inhibited host computer If several computers are connected on a network the controlling computer is the host computer A host computer can be a desktop laptop or notebook PC human readable A character printed in a font that can be read by a human as opposed to bar code symbology that can only be read by a machine input device A wand laser scanner or other device that scans bar code information into the terminal Glossary G Interleaved 2 of 5 code I 2 of 5 A high density self checking continuous numeric bar code symbology A bar code developed by Intermec that encodes the digits 0 through 9 The name Interleaved 2 of 5 is derived from the method used to encode two characters In this symbol two characters are paired using bars to represent the first character and interleaved spaces to represent the second character Each character has two wide elements and three narrow elements for a total of five elements Its maximum density is 7 8 characters per inch I 2 of 5 is mainly used in inventory distribution and the automobile industry IP Internet protocol This is the protocol for the network layer in TCP IP protocol It acts as a router for frames and is also responsible for frame addressing IP verifies it has all the frames to pass to the TCP layer and that they are in the correct order IP address An internal TCP IP protocol stack variable This address is a network lay
76. 32 is the standard American format for serial data transmission by cable that is from a computer terminal to a modem RS 232 transmission uses a distinctive 25 pin connector although in most cases not all the conductors are used See serial scanner devices Typically a light emitting device that reads a coded language This type of device includes wands and laser scanners Scanner mode Defines how the scanner operates when the trigger is pulled There are two types of modes One Shot or Automatic One Shot mode requires you to activate the scanner each time you want to scan a bar code Once you scan a bar code the scanner turns off Automatic mode allows you to activate the scanner once and scan a series of bar codes When you release the Scan button or trigger on a cabled scanner the scanner turns off To scan the same bar code more than once you must release the button or trigger or scan a different bar code before attempting a second scan scanner timeout Maximum time the scanner stays after you press the Scan button or activate a cabled laser scanner screen mapping An application that that allows you to map data fields from a smaller reader or terminal screen to larger 3270 or 5250 screens This image can be stored in the host in the Model 200 Controller or on the local device script file A file that provides instructions for navigating around host application screens It also provides instructions for mapping transaction
77. 39 mixed full ASCII Note Selecting HIBC Code 39 automatically sets the configuration to non full ASCII with the check digit transmitted To disable Code 39 Disable Code 39 CBO Or To enable Code 39 1 Scan this bar code Enter Accumulate Mode Enable Code 39 4 CB Configuration Command Reference 2 Scan one of these bar codes to set the first digit Without a Check Digit ss HIBC Code 39 43 With a Check Digit TE With AIAG Check Digit 4 3 Scan one of these bar codes to set the second digit Discard Check Digit Q Transmit Check Digit 1 4 Scan one of these bar codes to set the third digit Code 39 Non Full ASCII Q Code 39 Mixed Full ASCII fi 5 Scan this bar code Exit Accumulate Mode _ Code 39 Full ASCII 8 19 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Code 49 Purpose Default Syntax Scan 8 20 Enables or disables decoding of Code 49 symbology Code 49 is a multirow symbology for high data density The last character in each row is used for row checking and the last two characters of the symbol are used for overall checking Function codes designate where to place the predefined data string ina Code 49 label Whenever a terminal encounters a function code it replaces the function code with the defined string before transmitting the d
78. 4 3270 and 5250 TE Command Reference 9 Program Attention Keys for 3270 Terminals You can use the program attention keys to send messages to the host The specific application you use with your system defines these messages See your application user s manual for details on the messages each program attention key sends Program attention keys are AID keys Program Attention Key l t 8 Bar Code PA1 PA1 PA2 PA2 PA3 PA3 9 21 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Other Keys You can also find these commands on the 3270 or 5250 TE keypad These non ASCII EBCDIC keys are not shown in the Full ASCII Table in Appendix B Key Bar Code cent sign CENT These commands are only available on the 5250 TE keypad Key Bar Code Duplicate DUP Field Mark FM 9 22 V7T100 220 320 and ANSI TE Command Reference VT100 220 320 and ANSI TE Command Reference 1 0 This chapter lists all of the terminal emulation commands you can use on a TRAKKER 2425 terminal that is running VT100 220 320 or ANSI terminal emulation Editing Key Commands for VT220 320 Terminals The following Editing Key commands are listed in alphabetical order Each command is listed with its corresponding key sequence and bar code Program function keys are listed with their bar code but no description is p
79. 4 or 16 Mbps It is a network transport technology in which a token is passed around a ring topology TRAKKER 2400 Menu System A menu driven application that lets you configure the terminal view system information and run diagnostics You can access the TRAKKER 2400 Menu System while running any application transaction A transaction is made up of a header and a group of fields For example a work order transaction might have a transaction type and three fields consisting of a work order number part number and due date G 23 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual G 24 twinaxial A type of cable used to connect the Model 200 Controller directly to an IBM host Twinaxial cables consist of an outer layer of insulation an outer conductor another insulating layer and two side by side center conductors UDP User datagram protocol UDP protocol is an alternative to TCP This protocol is the Internet standard for wireless devices You can use UDP when you do not need a guaranteed delivery You can also use UDP when you do not require all the services of TCP UDP Plus This Intermec designed protocol is based on UDP UDP Plus improves the performance of devices in a mobile wireless environment Intermec uses this protocol to communicate between the Model 200 Controller and TRAKKER 2425 terminals unprotected field A displayed field in which a user can enter modify or delete data Contrast with protected fi
80. 425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 2 Choose System Menu and press The System Menu appears Set Time and Date Etore Configuration Upgrade Firmware N Select item CEnter Next screen CFil Help CEse Exit 242XU 051 3 Choose the Store Configuration command and press The Store Configuration screen appears STORE CONFIGURATION Etore Configuration in Flash Memory OK CANCEL 242XU 072 4 Choose OK to save the configuration in flash memory To exit without saving the configuration choose Cancel The System Menu appears 5 Press to exit the System Menu The Main Menu appears 6 Choose another menu from the Main Menu or press TRAKKER 2400 Menu System se to exit the 3 20 Configuring the Terminal 3 Restoring the Terminal s Default Configuration When you configure the terminal according to the instructions presented in this chapter the parameters remain in effect until you reconfigure them If you configure the terminal but do not save your changes in flash memory the parameters will remain in effect until you boot or reset the terminal The default configuration for the terminal is listed in Appendix A You can use the TRAKKER 2400 Menu System or scan the Default Configuration bar code label to return the terminal to its default configuration For help on the Default Configuration label see Default Configuration in Chap
81. 8 B FS 00111100 3C 60 G lt 00011101 1D 29 C GS 00111101 3D 61 H 00011110 1E 30 D RS 00111111 3E 62 I gt 00011111 1F 31 E US 00111111 3F 63 J TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Full ASCII Table continued Binary 01000000 01000001 01000010 01000011 01000100 01000101 01000110 01000111 01001000 01001001 01001010 01001011 01001100 01001101 01001110 01001111 01010000 01010001 01010010 01010011 01010100 01010101 01010110 01010111 01011000 01011001 01011010 01011011 01011100 01011101 01011110 01011111 Notes for the Full ASCII Table Bit positions are 76543210 Hexadecimal value Decimal value Code 39 character s ASCII character SP is the SPACE character The Code 39 characters P through Y may be interchanged with the numbers 0 through 9 May be interchanged with X or Y or Z n is the DELETE character OANaATFEWNR Hex 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4A 4B 4C 4D 4E 4F 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 5A 5B 5C 5D 5E 5F Dec 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 Char gt Y ONS SHCH VWO OZEr ASH T Oty Ae Binary 01100000 01100001 01100010 01100011 01100100 01100101 01100110 01100111 01101000 01101001 01101010 01101011 01101100 01101101 01101110 01101111 01110000 01110001 01110010 01
82. 9 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 4 20 Example 2 In the host application you want to set the value for two configuration commands on the terminal Send this transaction from the host application CS BV4DF30 Note The transaction header is not shown in this example where CS BV4 DF30 is a TMF Configuration Set request is the Change Configuration reader command sets the Beep Volume configuration command to a value of 4 which is a very loud beep volume sets the Display Backlight Timeout configuration command to a value of 30 seconds The terminal returns this transaction to the host application Cs BV4DF30 where Cs is a TMF Configuration Set response is the Change Configuration reader command BV4 means the Beep Volume configuration command has been changed to a value of 4 which is a very loud beep volume DF30 means the Display Backlight Timeout configuration command has been changed to a value of 30 seconds Operating the Terminal in a Network 4 About Network Connectivity and Protocols The TRAKKER 2425 terminals are hand held data collection terminals with network support The T2425 terminal communicates with a host computer in the 2 4 GHz network through the Model 200 Controller across the Ethernet network The 0100 Access Point acts as a bridge between the Ethernet network and the wireless 2 4 GHz network The controller supports the terminals using Intermec
83. AKKER 2425 terminal to emulate VT100 220 320 and ANSI terminals A Presents the terminal s specifications lists the configuration command names and syntax and describes the terminal s default configuration settings B Contains reference tables including the full ASCII table and full ASCII bar code chart C Provides a summary of available terminal emulation TE commands for all supported terminals A keypad chart shows how to enter all characters on each TE keypad and lists bar codes for performing the same function Terminology You should be aware of how these terms are being used in this manual Term Description T2425 The term T2425 indicates the specific type of terminal the TRAKKER 2425 terminal Terminal The generic term terminal indicates any TRAKKER 2400 series terminal More specific terms such as TRAKKER 2425 terminal or T2425 indicate a specific type of terminal TRAKKER 2400 The term TRAKKER 2400 indicates any terminal in the TRAKKER 2400 series of hand held data collection terminals TRAKKER Antares The term TRAKKER Antares identifies the product family The terms TRAKKER 2425 and T2425 are used in this manual to identify the TRAKKER Antares 2425 terminal For definitions of the technical terms used in this manual see the glossary Before You Begin Conventions for Input From a Keypad or Keyboard This table describes the formatting conventions for input from PC or host
84. AKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 2 6 How to Type the Characters Printed on the Keypad The TRAKKER 2425 terminal keypad is easy to use Characters symbols and functions are printed in four places on or above the keys The keys are also color coded to make it easier to remember key combinations Position on the Keypad Color To Type the Character Middle of the key White Press the key Left side above the key Blue Press the blue f key then the key Centered above the key Green Press the green key then the key Right side above the key Orange Press the orange f key then the key Note Some keys do not have any characters printed above the key on the top cover of the keypad To learn how to type characters use these illustrations and examples from the alphanumeric keypad and the IBM 5250 terminal emulation keypad To type characters using the basic keypad To type the character press _5 5 To type the number 5 press _5 To type characters using the IBM 5250 terminal emulation keypad To use the Fid function press _f _ ___ To type the asterisk character press _ Fid Fid To use the Fld function press 1 _ 8 To type the number 8 press _ 242XU 124 Learning How to Use the Terminal 2 Using the Function Left Right and Shift Keys The TRAKKER 2425 keypad does not have a physical ke
85. AN whose workstations are capable of being both clients and servers PIC Peripheral interface controller The PIC processor is an internal processor that manages the terminal s batteries pixel Pixel element One spot in a rectilinear grid of thousands of such spots that are individually painted to form an image produced on the screen by a computer or on paper by a printer A pixel is the smallest element that display software can manipulate in creating letters numbers or graphics Plessey code A fixed length continuous and non self checking bar code symbology Plessey code is pulse width modulated It includes a start character data characters an eight bit cyclic check digit a termination bar and usually a reverse start character Similar to MSI code port For hardware a connecting component that allows a microprocessor to communicate with a peripheral device For software a memory address that identifies the physical circuit used to transfer information between a microprocessor and a peripheral device POST Power on self test This test runs when you boot the terminal The test ensures that the terminal s hardware and peripherals are operational G 17 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual G 18 postamble A field of data that is sent after the data in a message It is typically used to tag transactions from the bar code reader or terminal for rapid processing by the host and it exp
86. Configuration Fe Or use the TRAKKER 2400 Menu System and follow the instructions in Restoring the Terminal s Default Configuration in Chapter 3 Note After you load the default configuration you may need to set the primary network communications parameters to communicate with other devices in the 2 4 GHz network Troubleshooting Problems While Operating the Terminal continued Problem You cannot scan bar code labels with the standard range scan module or the module for cabled scanners The terminal appears to be locked up and you cannot enter data Solution See Bar Code Labels Will Not Scan later in this chapter Try these possible solutions e Wait at least 10 seconds and try again If the terminal is still connecting to the controller the terminal ignores any input from the keypad or scanner Make sure the Connect icon appears and remains on before continuing Scan any bar code label to see if the terminal responds Press to turn off the terminal If it turns off press to turn on the terminal You can continue working If the terminal will not turn off press these keys in sequence to reset the terminal L O The terminal turns off Press to turn on the terminal It boots all the systems clears RAM memory and starts your application Note If the terminal does not boot when you press W you did not press the reset sequence correctly Press and hold the _t a
87. Conseil La terminal ne contient pas de pi ces r visibles par l utilisateur Le fait d ouvrir l unit annule la garantie et peut endommager les pi ces internes If you send the terminal in for service it is your responsibility to save the terminal data and configuration Intermec is responsible only for ensuring that the keypad and other hardware features match the original configuration when repairing or replacing your terminal Troubleshooting Terminal Will Not Turn On If you press 9 to turn on the TRAKKER 2425 terminal and nothing happens check the terminal for these possible problems For more help see Chapter 1 Getting Started Problem Solution A scan module is not installed Make sure a scan module is installed correctly You must install either a module for cabled scanners or a standard range scan module before you can turn on the terminal A main battery pack is not installed Remove the battery door on the terminal and make sure the You see the Battery icon on the top line main lithium ion battery pack is installed correctly Slide the of the display battery pack toward the top of the terminal to lock the battery pack into the connectors The main battery pack is not charged The main battery pack may be discharged Replace the You see the Battery icon on the top line battery pack with a spare charged battery pack or charge of the display the battery pack and try again 6 5 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand
88. E parameters Running Applications 5 Using the VTXXX ANSI Keypad The TRAKKER 2425 TE terminal comes with a special keypad that contains most of the keys available on your VT100 220 320 keyboard Use the T2425 keypad to enter data in the TE screens As on all terminal keyboards the keys on the T2425 keypad have their main character or function marked directly on the key itself To access that character or function just press the key Your TRAKKER 2425 terminal keypad provides access to TE commands and functions printed above the keys by pressing key combinations Use the Function Left _f Function Right f and Shift keys to access those characters or functions that do not have an actual key on the keypad Use this illustration to understand how the keypad works To use the Home function press _f _ 7 Home amp To type the ampersand amp character press _7 To type the number 7 press 7 7 Soe yp P 242XU 125 For help on how the keypad works see Using the Keypad in Chapter 2 Use this table to locate the VT220 320 editing key functions on the TRAKKER 2425 keypad VT220 320 Editing Key TRAKKER 2425 Key Find f K Insert f or f o Remove f M Select f P Previous screen fja Next screen f R 5 17 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Using the VTX
89. ER 2425 terminal must match the Network port that is set on the controller 05555 NGdata Acceptable values for data are any number from 5001 to 65535 To set the default UDP port scan this bar code Default UDP Port NG5555 To set the UDP port 1 Scan this bar code Enter Accumulate Mode Set UDP Port 4 4 NG 2 Scan a numeric value for data from these bar codes Q 71 TRE g ta 5 6 Q 3 Scan this bar code Exit Accumulate Mode _ Configuration Command Reference 7 Q 8 69 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual UPC EAN Purpose Enables or disables the decoding of Universal Product Code UPC European Article Numbering EAN symbology UPC EAN are fixed length numeric continuous symbologies that use four element widths A terminal that is configured to decode EAN bar codes can decode UPC but the reverse is not true UPC code is a subset of EAN code To define the UPC EAN symbology you set up to seven digits The fifth sixth and seventh digits are optional To set the sixth digit you must set the fifth digit To set the seventh digit you must set all seven digits Default First digit UPC A EAN 13 enabled Second digit UPC E enabled Third digit EAN 8 enabled Fourth digit Supplementals allowed Fifth digit Transmit check digit Sixth digit Transmit number system digit Seventh digit Retain leading zero for UPC A
90. GCFGRSP is a special transaction ID that the controller uses to forward configuration response data from a terminal All configuration responses will be routed with the NGCFGRSP transaction ID The controller cannot keep track of multiple applications sending configuration commands If you have two host applications sending configuration commands they must both be configured to receive the NGCFGRSP transactions and therefore both will receive all responses from all TRAKKER 2425 terminals To set up the host computer e Verify that you can communicate with the Model 200 Controller 4 17 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 4 18 To set up the application e Prepare and write a host application that can communicate with the controller and send transactions to and receive transactions from the terminal in this format transaction header TMF field configuration command where transaction header is a 96 byte field containing the message number date and time source application ID destinations application ID transaction ID and other information You must set the system message SYS MSG flag to E in the transaction header For help see the Model 200 Controller Technical Reference Manual TMF field is a 2 byte field containing one of these values CG Configuration Get request sent from the host application Cg Configuration Get response sent from the terminal to the host TMF field continued
91. Held Terminal User s Manual Problems While Operating the Terminal If you are operating the TRAKKER 2425 terminal and have trouble check these possible problems and solutions Problem You scan a reader command such as Backlight On and nothing happens You scan a valid bar code label to enter data for your application The data decoded by the scan module does not match the data encoded in the bar code label You want to set the terminal back to the default configuration to start over configuring the terminal 6 6 Solution The reader commands are disabled Scan the Enable Override command shown here to temporarily enable all of the reader commands You can also enable or disable reader commands with the TRAKKER 2400 Menu System For help see Command Processing in Chapter 8 When you are finished remember to disable the override so that your data is not interpreted as a command Enable Override 4 DC3 The terminal may have decoded the bar code label in a symbology other than the label s actual symbology Try scanning the bar code label again Make sure you scan the entire label To operate the terminal quickly and efficiently you should enable only the bar code symbologies that you are going to scan If you enable multiple symbologies the terminal may on rare occasions decode a bar code according to the wrong symbology and produce erroneous results Scan this bar code label Default
92. Hz network For help see Chapter 1 Getting Started Before you can run screen mapping on your terminal you need to generate a terminal template and script file on the Model 200 Controller For help see the Model 200 Controller System Manual If you have already completed these tasks you can start your screen mapping application Starting the Screen Mapping Application There are two ways to load a template on the T2425 terminal e You can download the template to the T2425 terminal from the controller For help see the Model 200 Controller System Manual e You can have the terminal request a template from the controller To request a template from the controller 1 Press the 9 key to turn on the terminal The T2425 terminal display prompts you to enter the name of the template you want to use File name 242XU 060 2 Type a template name and press The terminal displays your template menu Note Make sure your template name has a TPL file extension 5 26 Running Applications 5 Running Screen Mapping on Your Terminal Once you have selected a template you need to select the screen where you want to enter data To enter data into a screen 1 From the template menu use the A or V keys to highlight the screen you want to use ABC Company Hork order entry Ehipping Receiving Inventory Time card entry Select F2 File F4 242XU 061 2 Press to choose the screen
93. Interleaved 2 of 5 CA0 Enable Variable Length Without a Check Digit CA97 8 37 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Interleaved 2 of 5 continued 8 38 Enable Variable Length With a Check Digit 4 CA99 Enable Interleaved 2 of 5 Case Code CA98 To set Interleaved 2 of 5 to a fixed length 1 Scan this bar code Enter Accumulate Mode Set Fixed Length CA 2 Scan a numeric value for data from these bar codes Use even numbers 2 32 only MAA MAA E i 2E FIE 4 6 Q 3 Scan this bar code Exit Accumulate Mode _ Configuration Command Reference 8 Keypad Caps Lock Purpose Default Syntax Scan Turns the caps lock on and off With the caps lock turned on all alphabetic characters you type on the keypad will be uppercase or capital letters Caps lock off KAdata Acceptable values for data are 0 Caps lock off 1 Caps lock on One of these bar codes Caps Lock Off KA0 Caps Lock On KA1 8 39 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Keypad Clicker Purpose Default Syntax Scan 8 40 Enables or disables the keypad clicks The terminal sounds a click each time you press a key or decode a row of a two dimensional symbology Enabled KCdata Acceptable values for data are 0 Disable keypad clic
94. Intermec TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal Intermec Corporation 6001 36th Avenue West P O Box 4280 Everett WA 98203 9280 U S service and technical support 1 800 755 5505 U S media supplies ordering information 1 800 227 9947 Canadian service and technical support 1 800 688 7043 Canadian media supplies ordering information 1 800 268 6936 Outside U S and Canada Contact your local Intermec service supplier The information contained herein is proprietary and is provided solely for the purpose of allowing customers to operate and or service Intermec manufactured equipment and is not to be released reproduced or used for any other purpose without written permission of Intermec Information and specifications in this manual are subject to change without notice 1996 by Intermec Corporation All Rights Reserved The word Intermec the Intermec logo JANUS IRL TRAKKER Antares Duratherm Precision Print PrintSet Virtual Wedge and CrossBar are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Intermec Corporation Throughout this manual trademarked names may be used Rather than put a trademark or symbol in every occurrence of a trademarked name we state that we are using the names only in an editorial fashion and to the benefit of the trademark owner with no intention of infringement Contents Contents Before You Begin xv Warranty Information xv Safety Summary xv Warnings and Cau
95. KER 2400 Menu System Enter Test and Service Mode _ Note You must press the Left Enter key in this key sequence The Q key is located just under the 9 key TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual The Main Menu appears Diagnostics Menu Eustem Menu About TRAKKER 24606 N EFelect item CEnter Next screen CF11 Help LEsc l Exit 242XU 001 2 Press W twice to choose the System Menu and then press The System Menu appears Set Time and Date Etore Configuration Upgrade Firmware N elect item CEnter Next screen CFil Help CEse Exit 242XU 051 Getting Started fl 3 Press W to choose the Set Time and Date command and then press The Time and Date screen appears TIME AND DATE Current time is 11 37 63 Hew time 12 39 68 Current date is 96701712 Hew date C Y MM DD gt OK CANCEL 242XU 009 4 Type the current time in the format HH MM SS with a space character between each field and then press V The program fills in the colon character in the time field For example to enter the time 08 05 03 type ojl all oj 5 of af V Note The time is not actually updated until you exit the Time and Date screen When you set the time set the time ahead so that the correct time is saved when you exit the screen in Step 6 Type the curr
96. Manual Where Do You Go From Here Now that your new TRAKKER 2425 terminal is up and running you can use this manual to learn how to perform these tasks For Help With This Task See This Chapter To learn how to use the terminal s Chapter 2 Learning How to Use the keypad display audio signals Terminal batteries and scan module To learn how to change the Chapter 3 Configuring the Terminal terminal s configuration To add the terminal to your 2 4 GHz Chapter 4 Operating the Terminal in a RF data collection system and learn Network how to communicate with other devices To learn how to configure and use Chapter 5 Running Applications terminal emulation and screen mapping on the terminal To learn how to reset the terminal Chapter 6 Troubleshooting solve problems and respond to error messages 1 32 Learning How to Use the Terminal Learning How to Use the Terminal 2 This chapter describes and explains how to use the terminal s keypad display audio signals batteries memory and scan modules TRAKKER 2425 Terminal Features This chapter tells you about these features on the TRAKKER 2425 terminal Scan module Antenna for RF communications Rechargeable L batteries Sika 242XU 030 Keypad There are four keypad options an alphanumeric keypad and three different terminal emulation keypads The terminal ships with a keypad that supports the type of
97. R 2400 Series Belt Clip Instruction Sheet TRAKKER 2400 Series Handstrap Instruction Sheet TRAKKER 2400 Series Holster Instruction Sheet TRAKKER 2400 Series Module for Cabled Scanners Instruction Sheet TRAKKER 2400 Series Standard Range Scan Module Instruction Sheet TRAKKER 2400 Series Vehicle Mount Holder Instruction Sheet TRAKKER 2425 Hand Held Terminal Getting Started Guide Intermec Part No 062367 051241 063439 064398 064433 064218 064217 064215 064219 064220 064214 064183 Getting Started Getting Started fl This chapter introduces the TRAKKER Antares 2425 terminal and explains how to get your new terminal up and running What Is the TRAKKER Antares 2425 Terminal The TRAKKER Antares 2425 terminal T2425 is a hand held data collection terminal You use the terminal to collect and transmit data via radio communications in a 2 4 GHz network The T2425 ships loaded with the terminal emulation or screen mapping application you ordered You can use the terminal to emulate 3270 5250 or VT100 220 320 and ANSI terminals Scan module Antenna for RF communications Rechargeable batteries 242XU 030 The T2425 is ergonomically designed to make data collection easy and includes these features e Keypad with 56 keys to support data collection The terminal ships with a keypad to match the application you ordered e Rechargeable lithium ion battery pack shipped separately for main power and rechargea
98. RR as me LEO OT TNT FCLT i e UEO AT FCRT le li a UDOT TT FLD ee eye aa MUDO UDD FLD eer hee aoe LULL FLDX eres ULL HELP Rete aise LILLIA HOME Terminal Emulation Command Reference C 3270 and 5250 Terminal Emulation Commands continued To Enter Press the Key s Or Scan This Bar Code a UU AON ATA INS wens oad ULL TU ONL op one aa UU IMT PGDN P EON MN TA PGLT AERE UU IMT AAI PGRT Seren UU QU AY PGUP D MUEVO RST ER a UU TION MA TT RODN ila aia UU IMM TA ROUP Status f a STAT TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 3270 and 5250 Terminal Emulation Commands continued To Enter Press the Key s Or Scan This Bar Code ter ae UAC ATA SYSR re MUA I lt HT gt a MDDI DN aces ae MUDD DITIT LF ile deel ULL ICL ORT ii tees a A ULLAL UP Terminal Emulation Command Reference 3270 and 5250 Additional Functions These charts list the bar codes for additional 3270 and 5250 terminal emulation functions 3270 and 5250 Additional Functions To Enter Press the Keys Or Sca
99. RT acl UA A A LN UP Note Do not choose to exit the terminal emulation program If you do accidentally exit TE you may see an error message on the status line Clear the error and continue C 13 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Program Function Keys These charts list the keypad sequences and the bar codes you can scan to execute function keys for 3270 5250 and VTXXX ANSI TE on the TRAKKER 2425 terminal Note VT220 320 TE only supports function keys F1 through F20 VT100 only supports function keys F1 through F5 Program Function Keys To Enter Press the Key s Or Scan This Bar Code k 7 AUC F1 F TAE F2 i NOON F3 ANAT FA gt 2 AMA F5 F AO AMICI oF6 F7 Be AU F7 Fa AMA oF8 C 14 Terminal Emulation Command Reference C Program Function Keys continued To Enter Press the Key s Or Scan This Bar Code MA A N F9 O TAA F10 O OTN NT F11 UNNI NN F12 IN OTN F13 L L L MODA O MODAN F10 5 F11 RE F12 DE F13 f F14 DE F14 F15 F16 F17 F18 F15 f E F16 f F F17 DE F18 f H C 15 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual C 16 Program Functio
100. SB1 Configuration Command Reference Scanner Redundancy Purpose Default Syntax Scan Defines the number of scans voting the scanner takes of the same label that must decode correctly for a good read of the label Voting requires the terminal to decode the same bar code multiple times during a single scanner event and to compare the decoded information a specific number of times before signaling a good read There are three options None Allows the terminal to accept the first good read which speeds up terminal performance This setting is recommended when scanning good quality bar codes Normal The terminal decodes the bar code a minimum number of times in each scanner event The number of comparisons that are made depends on each bar code symbology High The terminal scans and decodes the bar code a maximum number of times in each scanner event The specific number of comparisons depends on each bar code symbology The high setting is recommended when scanning poor quality labels that may cause substitution errors For example when you scan Code 39 labels and the scanner redundancy is set to normal two successive matching decodes in a single scanner event are required When scanner redundancy is set to high three successive matching decodes in a single scanner event are required Normal SRdata Acceptable values for data are 0 None 1 Normal 2 High One of these bar codes None SRO
101. Save new configuration Yez Ho CANCEL 242XU 023 2 Choose Yes and press if you want to save the TE configuration Your terminal saves the configuration options to flash memory and the sign on screen appears Choose No and press if you do not want to save the TE configuration You exit the TE Configuration menu and the sign on screen appears Choose Cancel and press to return to the TE Configuration menu You can continue making changes to the TE configuration Running Applications 5 Understanding Status Line Messages TRAKKER 2425 terminals provide a status line when configured as 3270 or 5250 terminals You will see the status messages on the status line or bottom line of the terminal display The status messages report the operating status of both the T2425 terminal and the host system Use f to toggle the status line on and off or scan this bar code Status STAT You will see screens similar to these TE Session Established Host Processing Data Sign on Eign on DS ka ae ae eae E UGEN aa ae ere Password 000 Password 008 Program procedure Program procedure Menu 2 ee ee Menu 2 eee ee Current Library Current Library TNHAPP CUFT TNAPP XS 5 F LOCK 242XU 024 This table summarizes information you may see in the status line Status Line Message blank ERR 5250 only De
102. Syntax CEdata where data must be 4 to 7 digits selected from this list First digit 0 UPC A EAN 13 disabled 1 UPC A EAN 13 enabled 2 UPC A only enabled Second digit 0 UPC E disabled 1 UPC E enabled Third digit 0 EAN 8 disabled 1 EAN 8 enabled Fourth digit 0 Supplementals are not allowed 1 Supplementals are allowed Fifth digit 0 Discard check digit 1 Transmit check digit Sixth digit 0 Discard number system digit 1 Transmit number system digit Seventh digit 0 Discard the leading zero for UPC A 1 Retain the leading zero for UPC A 8 70 Scan Configuration Command Reference To disable UPC EAN scan this bar code Disable UPC EAN 4 CE000000 To enable UPC EAN 1 Scan this bar code Enter Accumulate Mode Enable UPC EAN 4 CE 2 Scan one of these bar codes to set the first digit Disable UPC EAN 13 Enable UPC EAN 13 Q 71 Enable UPC A Only xe 3 Scan one of these bar codes to set the second digit Disable UPC E Enable UPC E Q 71 4 Scan one of these bar codes to set the third digit Disable EAN 8 Enable EAN 8 Q I 8 71 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual UPC EAN continued 8 72 5 Scan one of these bar codes to set the fourth digit Supplementals Not Allowed Supplementals Allowed Q 71 Optional Scan one of these bar codes to set the fifth digit Discard Check Digit Transmit Chec
103. Terminal Menu Keypad option Terminal Menu Preamble Postamble option Terminal Menu Preamble Postamble option Terminal Menu Reader Commands option 3 29 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Terminal Operations Table continued Parameter Syntax Reader Commands DC Enable Disable specific Reader Commands Resume Execution ER Scan Ahead SD Scanner Mode SB Scanner Redundancy SR Scanner Selection SS See the Note below Scanner Timeout SA Scanner Trigger SC Time in Seconds DA Note The Scanner Selection command is only used when you have a module for cabled scanners installed Options Backlight Backspace Change Configuration Clear Default Configuration Enter Accumulate mode Exit Accumulate mode Multiple Read Labels Reset Scanner Trigger Off Scanner Trigger On Test amp Service Mode Not Allowed Allowed Disabled Enabled One Shot mode Automatic Auto trigger mode None Normal High All compatible scanners 146x CCD scanners 155x laser scanners 151x laser scanners 1545 laser scanner Symbol scanners Disabled 0 1 60 seconds Level Edge Disabled Enabled Location in Configuration Menu Terminal Menu Reader Commands option Enable single commands option Terminal Menu Power Management option Terminal Menu Scanner option Terminal Menu Scanner option Terminal Menu Scanner option Terminal Menu Scanner op
104. The screen you chose appears on the terminal display and the screen name is in the title bar 3 Type or scan data into the fields Use the A V or to accept the data for each field 4 When you finish entering data into the fields e Press to send the transaction to the controller e Press to reset the screen and reposition the cursor to the first input field without sending the data e Press to exit the screen without sending the data and return to the template screen menu 5 27 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 5 28 Requesting a New Template You can run one terminal template at a time on the TRAKKER 2425 terminal If you want to change templates you need to request a new one from the Model 200 Controller To request a new template from the controller 1 From the template screen menu press to download a new template 2 Type the name of the template you want to use when the screen prompts you to enter a file name Note Make sure your template name has a TPL file extension File name 242XU 060 3 Press The new template menu appears on your terminal Running Applications 5 Loading a Validation File Use a validation file to ensure that the information you enter in the input fields of your terminal screen is correct There are two ways to load a validation file on the T2425 terminal e You can download the validation file to the T2425 terminal
105. Viewport Down DN Viewport Left LF Viewport Right RT 3270 and 5250 TE Command Reference Status This command toggles the T2425 display between the status line display and the normal field input display Press this key once to bring up the status line and press it again to remove the status line If a local editing error occurs for any reason the status line automatically appears displaying an error message Keypad t Scan Status X STAT System Request The use of these AID keys depends on the system Most systems use these commands to sign on or off select alternate tasks interrupt the present program to start a new task or request permission to send data To cancel the System Request command press the Error Reset ErrRst key If you press any other key before pressing the key an error occurs For 5250 terminals the System Request command prompts the host system to display the System Request Menu Keypad f u Scan System Request SYSR 9 15 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Tab The Tab key moves the cursor to the first position in the next input field Keypad Tab lt HT gt 9 16 3270 and 5250 TE Command Reference 9 When you press a program function key or scan its bar code you send the data on the display to the host and the function you specified is performed on this data Each function is
106. XX ANSI Keypad q Return Return 5 sy Home amp Ore 7 8 9 Pot PgRt 4 5 6 PgDn Function Left FnL key 2 3 Ins Del_ gt 0 Enter ae Fit M2 Fis Ez Fo olala 5 gt Function Right FnR key Fie gt F7 Fig F19 F20 7 F s H J N l Find ins Rem K C M N o lt Sel gt Prv Next P e R s T D I Shift key _ a Cee Ese a ea Cae Ae Taa DO 5 18 Running Applications 5 Configuring VIXXX ANSI TE Parameters You can configure several parameters for VTXXX ANSI terminal emulation on the TRAKKER 2425 terminal These are the TE parameters you can configure e Terminal e Communications e Viewport Configuring Terminal Emulation Screens and Options You can access the TE Configuration menu at any time during your terminal emulation session Use this procedure to configure your VTXXX ANSI terminal emulation program To configure VTXXX ANSI TE options 1 Press f E to access the TE Configuration menu The Terminal Emulation menu appears TERMINAL EMULATION Exit TE N Select item LEnter Next CF11 Help LEscl Exit 242XU 018 Note Do not choose the Exit TE option which exits the terminal emulation application If you do accidentally exit TE a warning screen appears and you will be prom
107. You can access the TRAKKER 2400 Menu System while running any application To access the TRAKKER 2400 Menu System Press _f 7 2 or scan this bar code Note You must press the Left Enter key in this key sequence not the D Right Enter or keys Enter Test and Service Mode _ The Main Menu appears displaying four menu options Diagnostics Menu Eustem Menu About TRAKKER 24606 N Eelect item CEnter Next screen CF11 Help LEsc l Exit 242XU 001 Configuration Menu Choose the Configuration Menu to configure bar code symbologies network and communications parameters and the terminal s operating characteristics 3 6 Configuring the Terminal 3 Diagnostics Menu Choose the Diagnostics Menu to run hardware software or system diagnostics to help analyze and fix problems on the terminal You can also view information about the system For help see Running Diagnostics in Chapter 6 System Menu Choose the System Menu to load the default configuration set the time and date store the terminal s configuration in flash memory and upgrade the firmware About TRAKKER 2400 Choose this option to see part number and version information about the boot code and firmware loaded on the T2425 terminal You may need this information if you are working a problem with an Intermec representative Exploring the Configuration and System Menus When you acce
108. _f Function Right f Shift and Control A keys to access those characters or functions that do not have an actual key on the keypad Use this illustration to understand how the keypad works To use the Fid function press _f _ ___ To type the asterisk character press _ Fid Fid 242XU 124 To use the Fld function press 1 _ 8 To type the number 8 press _ For help on how the keypad works see Using the Keypad in Chapter 2 Running Applications 5 Using the 3270 or 5250 Keypad 3270 co Cc oF d nter o US ED 5250 a C TE FIO _ M3 F10 M3 7 F8 M1 F9 M2 F7 F8 M1 F9 M2 G Home amp PAL x PgUp Home amp Fid x Fid PgUp fs 8 9 7 8 9 PgLit PA2 PgRt Polft PgRt 4 5 6 4 5 6 End_ PAS PgDn End 1 PgDn Function Left FnL key i 3 P 1 2 3 BkSp ns Del gt BkSp Ins_ Del gt f 5 0 e 0 L i J FnL Fn R Enter Fn FoR Enter f jo t pea a 5 _ Fi2 F13 F14 F15 Function Right FnR key 2ST a 5 aie al A B 6 D E L L J J Fie gt Fi7 Fig Fi9 F20 Fie gt F17 Fi8 Fi9 F20
109. a Interleaved 2 of 5 Code I 2 of 5 8 37 CBdata Code 39 8 16 CCdata Code 2 of 5 2 of 5 8 14 CDdata Codabar 8 10 CEdata UPC EAN 8 70 CFdata Code 93 8 22 CGdata Code 11 8 12 CHdata Code 128 8 23 Cldata Plessey 8 45 CJdata Code 49 8 20 CKdata Code 49 Function Code 1 8 20 CLdata Code 49 Function Code 2 8 20 CMdata Code 49 Function Code 3 8 20 CNdata MSI 8 41 CPdata Code 16K 8 13 CSdata Decode Security 8 31 DAdata Time in Seconds 8 67 DBdata Time and Date 8 66 DCdata Command Processing 8 25 DEdata Append Time 8 6 DFdata Display Backlight Timeout 8 34 DJdata Display Contrast 8 36 A 10 Terminal Specifications 4 Configuration Commands by Syntax continued Syntax ERdata EZdata KAdata KCdata NAdata NCdata NDdata NGdata NLdata NSdata NXdata RBdata RSdata RWaata SAdata SBdata SCdata SDdata SRdata SSdata Command Resume Execution Automatic Shutoff Keypad Caps Lock Keypad Clicker Network Activate Controller IP Address Terminal IP Address UDP Port Network Loopback Subnet Mask Default Router RF Wakeup On Broadcast RF Security Identification RF Domain Scanner Timeout Scanner Mode Scanner Trigger Scan Ahead Scanner Redundancy Scanner Selection For Help See Page 8 50 8 7 8 39 8 40 8 43 8 29 8 64 8 68 8 44 8 62 8 32 8 54 8 52 8 51 8 60 8 56 8 61 8 55 8 57 8 59 A 11 Full ASCII Charts Full ASCII Charts This appendix contains a full ASCII chart and ch
110. ad decode 6 6 UPC EAN configuring 8 70 battery charger charging the battery pack 1 6 2 25 cold temperatures guidelines 6 27 terminal accessory described 1 4 battery door opening 1 6 2 20 Battery icon blinks low battery power 6 9 6 27 described 2 17 low battery power 2 34 remains on low battery power 6 8 6 9 Index I Battery Monitor screen defined 6 44 battery pack charging 1 6 2 25 temperature range A 4 cold temperatures using in 6 27 described 2 19 installing 1 9 2 22 low battery charge 2 34 6 8 power capacity remaining 2 20 2 33 6 45 managing 2 19 2 35 6 26 specifications A 3 removing 2 20 temperature and volts checking 6 44 terminal accessory described 1 4 Battery Status screen defined 6 45 beep audio signals for status 2 18 battery power low 6 8 6 9 Beep Volume command 8 8 testing using diagnostics 6 46 three low beeps troubleshooting 6 11 6 12 volume adjusting from the keypad 2 14 Beeper Test screen defined 6 46 belt clip terminal accessory 1 4 binary table of ASCII characters B 3 to B 5 blue keys using 2 6 Boot Menu troubleshooting 6 8 using 6 29 booting the terminal 6 28 to 6 30 configuration used 3 19 configuring the key 6 28 8 50 POST failed error message 6 8 turning on the terminal 1 29 box shipping list of contents 1 5 C cabled scanners configuring for scan module 8 59 list for scan module A 6 capitalizing characters Ke
111. address field consists of four separate numbers each separated by a period Note The network cannot be activated if the first address segment in the IP address is set to 0 127 or a number greater than 223 Scan To set the default controller IP address scan this bar code Default Controller IP Address NC0 0 0 0 Or To set the controller IP address 1 Scan this bar code Enter Accumulate Mode Set Controller IP Address 4 NC 2 Scan a numeric value from 0 to 255 to set an n field of the controller IP address from these bar codes ML Q 1 8 29 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Controller IP Address continued AMA MAU 2 3 MUN AU 4 D MUA A 6 a7 MU ALMA ERE Q 3 Scan this bar code Period 4 Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to set the next two numbers in the controller IP address field After you scan the last address segment go to Step 5 Do not scan the period after the last address segment 5 Scan this bar code Exit Accumulate Mode N _ 8 30 Configuration Command Reference Decode Security Purpose Default Syntax Scan Defines the security level to use when decoding bar codes When you select a lower decode security level the terminal can decode bar codes with poorer print quality Note Only use the low parameter as a temporary solution until you can improve the bar code label print quality M
112. adio Test Purpose Where Available Sample Screen Definition CAUTION Troubleshooting Use the Radio Test screen to verify that you have a working radio Hardware Diagnostics menu RADIO TEST TESTING Test PASSED CEnter Execute test CEsecl Exit 242XU 138 Before you start the test make sure the radio Network Activate command is enabled If the radio is disabled the test results on the Radio Test screen are not valid For help see Network Activate in Chapter 8 Press to start the radio test The results of the test display on the screen once the test is complete If SUCCESS or PASSED display the radio is working correctly If FAILED displays note the error number You may have a problem with the radio inside the terminal For help contact your local Intermec service representative Caution If the Radio Test fails stop using the terminal Contact your local Intermec service representative Conseil Si le test Radio choue veuillez ne plus utiliser le terminal Contactez le repr sentant du service client le Intermec de votre r gion 6 51 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual RS 232 Loop Back Purpose Use the RS 232 Loop Back test to verify that the hardware for the RS 232 port is functioning correctly Note The RS 232 port will be available in a future model of the TRAKKER 2425 terminal Where Available Hardware Diagnostics menu Sample Scr
113. age 6 8 postamble ASCII control characters entering 3 12 Field Exit configuring to auto advance 5 14 Postamble command 8 46 power management automatic shutoff using 8 7 backup battery using 2 26 battery capacity remaining 2 33 6 45 battery pack using 2 19 guidelines for 2 35 6 26 low Battery icon 2 17 2 34 resume suspend and boot 8 50 RF Wakeup On Broadcast disabling 8 54 power battery specifications A 3 Index I preamble ASCII control characters entering 3 12 Field Exit configuring to auto advance 5 14 Preamble command 8 48 Preamble Postamble screen using 3 12 Previous Screen command VTXXX ANSI 10 6 print quality bar code 8 31 8 57 program attention keys 3270 TE 9 21 C 9 program function keys 3270 and 5250 9 17 C 14 VTXXX ANSI 10 7 C 14 protocol stack defined 4 21 to 4 23 punctuation marks bar code labels to scan B 8 Q quiet zone bar code labels 2 41 quotation marks in commands using 3 18 8 46 8 48 R radio country code displayed 6 49 troubleshooting 6 51 Radio icon described 2 16 remains on troubleshooting 1 26 4 12 6 13 Radio Test screen defined 6 51 RAM default configuration saving 7 11 described 2 36 saving configuration changes 3 14 3 19 specifications A 5 troubleshooting 6 47 RDRANSI terminal type selecting 5 20 Reader Command Menu using 3 11 reader commands Accumulate mode using 7 4 Backlight On and Off 7 9 Backspace 7 6 Ch
114. ains on after a good read of a bar code label You can use the Scanner Trigger Off command to turn off the scanner or set the Scanner Timeout command to automatically turn off the scanner after it stays on for the period of time set For help on configuring the Scanner Mode or Scanner Trigger commands see Chapter 8 Configuration Command Reference Note Intermec does not recommend that you use a Scanner Trigger On or Off command with the Scanner Trigger command set to edge triggering The Scanner Trigger On command is the same as pushing the Scan button ae Not supported Not supported Purpose From Network Keypad Scan Reader Command Reference The Scanner Trigger Off command is the same as releasing the Scan button Its effect depends on the Scanner and Trigger mode configuration settings as described earlier ole Not supported Not supported Test and Service Mode Purpose From Network Keypad Scan Starts the TRAKKER 2400 Menu System From the Main Menu the Diagnostics Menu is the Test and Service mode you can use to run software hardware and system diagnostics on the terminal For help see Running Diagnostics in Chapter 6 ee Test and Service Mode _ 2 M 7 15 Configuration Command Reference Configuration Command Reference This chapter is an alphabetical list of all the configuration commands supported on the
115. akes the form of lt start code data stop code gt A regular bar code label is executed when you scan it Contrast with multiple read label resume When you press 9 to turn the terminal on the terminal either resumes exactly where it was when you turned it off or the terminal boots and restarts your application Resume is controlled through the Resume Execution configuration command Contrast with Suspend mode RF data collection system Radio frequency data collection system in which the individual components communicate with each other by radio signals RF security identification ID Defines the password for secured transmission and receipt of data between devices in the wireless network To communicate each 0100 Access Point and TRAKKER 2425 terminal must have matching security IDs ROM Read only memory Usually a small memory that contains often used instructions such as microprograms or system software ROM is programmed during memory fabrication and cannot be reprogrammed router A software and hardware connection between two or more subnetworks that permits traffic to be routed from one network to another based on the intended destinations of that traffic G 19 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual G 20 RS 232 Widely recognized protocol standard for serial binary data interchange The standard covers the physical electrical and functional characteristics of the interface RS 2
116. al 2 Disposing of the NiCad Backup Battery The materials used in the construction of the TRAKKER 2425 NiCad backup battery are recyclable Intermec strongly urges that you recycle the backup batteries when they reach the end of their useful lives Additionally the Environmental Protection Agency has classified worn out or damaged NiCad batteries or battery packs to be hazardous waste Several states have passed legislation that prohibits discarding these batteries into the municipal waste stream If you have any question on how to recycle or dispose of the NiCad backup batteries contact your local county or state hazardous waste management office Checking the Power Remaining in the Batteries You can use the terminal s diagnostics to check the power remaining in the main battery pack and to check the status of the backup battery Use the TRAKKER 2400 Menu System to check the status of the batteries For help see Running Diagnostics in Chapter 6 2 33 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 2 34 Recognizing a Low or Discharged Battery If you see the Battery icon or hear a beep every 15 seconds the terminal is indicating that the main battery pack or the backup battery power is almost exhausted Use this table to find out which battery is low or discharged Low Battery Warning What You Need to Do 242XU 110 The Battery icon turns on and stays on and the terminal beeps every 15 sec
117. al Emulation on page 5 16 e Using 3270 and 5250 Screen Mapping on page 5 26 Running Applications 5 Using 3270 and 5250 Terminal Emulation Your TRAKKER 2425 terminal contains a special keypad and firmware that provide most of the commands available to emulate an IBM 3270 or 5250 terminal You can use your T2425 terminal to e view host terminal screens on your T2425 display e enter data into the screens using the scan module or keypad e access host commands and perform host functions e automatically transmit the data to the host After you have installed the terminal in your system you need to learn how to configure and use the terminal emulation application The next sections cover these topics e Using the 3270 or 5250 keypad e Configuring 3270 or 5250 TE parameters e Understanding status line messages TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Using the 3270 or 5250 Keypad The TRAKKER 2425 terminal comes with a special keypad that contains most of the keys available on your 3270 or 5250 terminal keyboard Use the T2425 keypad to enter data in the TE screens As on all terminal keyboards the keys on the T2425 keypad have their main character or function marked directly on the key itself To access that character or function just press the key Your T2425 keypad provides access to TE commands and functions printed above the keys by pressing key combinations Use the Function Left
118. am between must be on the same IP subnetwork The terminal cannot roam between IP subnetworks 4 5 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Installing and Configuring the Terminal 4 6 Before you can begin using the TRAKKER 2425 terminal to collect data you need to install and configure each device in the 2 4 GHz network by performing these steps 1 Plan and prepare your network Make sure you have all the equipment required to use the terminal in the network Make sure you have IP addresses for all devices in the network 2 Configure the Model 200 Controller 3 Configure the 0100 Access Point 4 Configure each TRAKKER 2425 terminal Each step is described in detail in the next sections Planning the Network Connection To use the TRAKKER 2425 terminal in the 2 4 GHz network you need these minimum requirements e Model 200 Controller e 0100 Access Point e An Ethernet cable drop 10Base2 thin coax BNC or 10BaseT twisted pair When you first consider purchasing a wireless data collection system an Intermec representative works with you to perform a site survey at your facility The site survey analyzes the range of radio frequency devices in your facility and determines the placement of the access points The site survey ensures that the coverage of each access point overlaps to provide uninterrupted wireless access at any location within the building This manual assumes that a site survey is comple
119. ands the data field record length Similar to the preamble power management Software and procedures that extend the life of a terminal s lithium ion main battery pack and NiCad backup battery preamble Predefined data that is automatically appended to the beginning of entered data Similar to the postamble protected field In word processing preset data or an area that cannot be changed or overridden by an operator without altering the program On a display device a display field in which a user cannot enter modify or erase data Contrast with unprotected field protocol character See ASCII control character protocol stack A group of drivers that work together to span the layers in the network protocol hierarchy PSK TRAKKER Antares Programmer s Software Kit A library of software functions for creating applications on the TRAKKER Antares 2400 series terminals radio frequency RF A frequency at which coherent electromagnetic radiation of energy is useful for communications purposes roughly the range from 10 KHz to 300 GHz Glossary G RAM Random access memory Memory that can be written into or read by locating any data address reader command A reader command causes the terminal to perform a task You can enter a reader command by typing on the keypad by scanning a bar code label or by sending a command from a device on the 2 4 GHz network regular label A bar code label that t
120. ange Configuration 7 10 Clear 7 6 configuring from controller 4 15 from host 4 17 to 4 20 Default Configuration 7 11 I 13 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual reader commands continued enabling or disabling 8 25 to 8 28 Enter 7 7 Enter Accumulate mode 7 6 Exit Accumulate mode 7 7 Multiple Read Labels 7 12 operating commands 7 8 Reset 7 13 Scanner Trigger Off 7 15 Scanner Trigger On 7 14 Test and Service Mode 7 15 troubleshooting 6 6 6 11 using 7 3 recoverable errors 3270 and 5250 TE 6 15 Remove command VTXXX ANSI 10 6 removing backup battery 2 27 battery pack 2 20 scan module 2 38 replacement parts ordering 6 31 reset 3270 command 9 13 reader command 7 13 resetting the terminal 6 28 to 6 30 7 13 default configuration restoring 3 21 firmware and hardware 6 30 firmware upgrading 3 23 resume booting the terminal on 6 28 described 1 29 Resume Execution command 8 50 retaining ring replacing on antenna 6 32 RF communications 2 4 GHz network illustrated 1 14 4 3 to 4 5 applications using 4 11 battery power managing 2 35 icons using to monitor 2 16 4 12 roaming between access points 4 14 site survey planning 4 6 specifications A 5 See also network RF domain configuration command 8 51 configuring 1 23 defined 4 9 I 14 RF security ID configuration command 8 52 configuring 1 23 defined 4 9 not being saved 6 10 RF Wakeup On Broadcast com
121. ange the backup battery Learning How to Use the Terminal 2 Using the Scan Module You use the scan module accessories with the TRAKKER 2425 terminal to scan and enter bar code data The terminal decodes the bar code label and enters the data or command you scanned There are two types of scan modules available e Module for cabled scanners e Standard range scan module Important You must have a scan module attached to use the terminal The module for cabled scanners has a port to attach a wand laser scanner or CCD scanner The standard range scan module has an integrated laser scanner For more information about either scan module see the instruction sheet that ships with the module You can scan bar code labels with the integrated standard range scan module or with the scanner device that is connected to the module for cabled scanners When you unpack the terminal and begin using it only three bar code symbologies are enabled Code 39 Code 128 and UPC EAN If you are using bar code labels that are encoded in another symbology you need to enable that symbology on the terminal For help see Enabling Bar Code Symbologies in Chapter 1 or find the symbology in Chapter 8 Configuration Command Reference Note The Scan button on the terminal keypad does not activate the scanner device connected to the module for cabled scanners The next sections cover these topics e Installing a Scan Module e Using the Stan
122. application you ordered on the terminal CGA compatible display The terminal display is a backlit LCD display that is 16 lines by 20 characters Depending on the application you can use the viewport features to move around a full 25 line by 80 character display Audio signals The terminal and scan module have a beeper and internal speakers to sound audio signals as you scan bar code labels and enter data Antenna for RF communications The T2425 terminal uses radio frequency RF to communicate with the 0100 Access Point and the Model 200 Controller 2 3 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Rechargeable batteries The terminal uses a rechargeable lithium ion battery pack and a rechargeable NiCad backup battery to provide power Memory The terminal has a total of IMB RAM for system memory and 2MB flash memory for long term storage of firmware configuration data and user applications Scan modules You must attach a scan module to the terminal to scan bar code data There are two scan module options a standard range scan module and a module for cabled scanners Using the Keypad 2 4 The TRAKKER 2425 terminal has four keypad options e Standard alphanumeric keypad for 3270 and 5250 screen mapping e IBM 3270 terminal emulation keypad e IBM 5250 terminal emulation keypad e VT100 220 320 and ANSI terminal emulation keypad All four alphanumeric keypads have 56 keys Although the keypad is smaller than a deskto
123. ar This command deletes the entire data record you are accumulating Enter This command will enter data as a record and leaves the terminal in Accumulate mode Note If you are not in Accumulate mode the Backspace Clear and Enter commands have no effect and you will hear an error beep When you exit Accumulate mode the accumulated data is entered as a data record Up to 250 characters can be held in the buffer If the data record count exceeds 250 characters the data is truncated If you reset the terminal software or hardware reset you exit Accumulate mode the entire buffer is cleared and all data accumulated is lost To use Accumulate mode The syntax to use the Enter Accumulate command is data where is the syntax for the Enter Accumulate mode command data is the optional data you want to enter Data can be a reader command that is executed when you exit Accumulate mode Reader Command Reference 1 Scan this bar code label to Enter Accumulate mode Enter Accumulate Mode 4 2 Scan the bar code label s for the data you want to enter You can scan labels from the Full ASCII Bar Code Chart in Appendix B For example scan this label to change the terminal s configuration and set the preamble to the characters ABC Change Configuration Set Preamble to ABC 4 ADABC Or to edit the accumulated data scan one of these bar code labels Backspace Clear
124. arts of Code 39 bar code labels that you can scan with the TRAKKER 2425 terminal Full ASCII Table This table lists the ASCII characters and their binary hexadecimal and Code 39 equivalents Full ASCII Table Binary Hex Dec C393 Chart Binary Hex Dec C393 Chart 00000000 00 00 U NUL 00100000 20 32 SP SP5 00000001 01 01 A SOH 00100001 21 33 A 00000010 02 02 B STX 00100010 22 34 B i 00000011 03 03 C ETX 00100011 23 35 C 00000100 04 04 D EOT 00100100 24 36 D 00000101 05 05 E ENQ 00100101 25 37 E 00000110 06 06 F ACK 00100110 26 38 F amp 00000111 07 07 G BEL 00100111 27 39 G 00001000 08 08 H BS 00101000 28 40 H 00001001 09 09 I HT 00101001 29 41 I 00001010 OA 10 J LF 00101010 2A 42 J 00001011 0B 11 K VT 00101011 2B 43 K 00001100 oC 12 L FF 00101100 2C 44 L 00001101 0D 13 M CR 00101101 2D 45 M z 00001110 0E 14 N SO 00101110 2E 46 N 00001111 OF 15 O SI 00101111 2F 47 O 00010000 10 16 P DLE 00110000 30 48 P6 0 00010001 11 17 Q DC1 00110001 31 49 Q 1 00010010 12 18 R DC2 00110010 32 50 R 2 00010011 13 19 S DC3 00110011 33 51 S 3 00010100 14 20 T DC4 00110100 34 52 T 4 00010101 15 21 U NAK 00110101 35 53 U 5 00010110 16 22 V SYN 00110110 36 54 V 6 00010111 17 23 W ETB 00110111 37 55 W 7 00011000 18 24 X CAN 00111000 38 56 X 8 00011001 19 25 Y EM 00111001 39 57 Y 9 00011010 1A 26 Z SUB 00111010 3A 58 Z 00011011 1B 27 A ESC 00111011 3B 59 F 00011100 1C 2
125. at You Will Find in This Manual This table summarizes the information in each chapter and appendix Chapter 1 What You Will Find Summarizes the terminal s features functions and accessories Describes how to unpack your new terminal and get it started for the first time Explains how to use the terminal s keypad display audio signals batteries and scan modules Explains how to change the terminal s configuration Describes the 2 4 GHz radio frequency network and explains how to install and configure the terminal to communicate with other devices in the network Explains how to configure and use the terminal to emulate IBM 3270 IBM 5250 or VT100 220 320 and ANSI terminals Provides instructions for configuring and running the applications firmware that ships with your terminal Lists solutions for the problems you may have while operating the terminal Explains how to use the terminal s diagnostics to research and troubleshoot problems Describes the commands that change the terminal s operation Describes the commands that change the terminal s configuration xvii TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual xviii What You Will Find in This Manual continued Chapter What You Will Find 9 Lists all of the terminal emulation commands you can use on the TRAKKER 2425 terminal to emulate IBM 3270 or 5250 terminals 10 Lists all of the terminal emulation commands you can use on the TR
126. ata to the Model 200 Controller A single Code 49 symbol may contain several different variable length data fields Function Code 1 F1 identifies a data system Function Code 2 F2 indicates the end of a data field Disabled CJdata Code 49 CKdata Function Code 1 CLdata Function Code 2 CMadata Function Code 3 Acceptable values for data are Code 49 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Function Code 1 Any two ASCII characters Function Code 2 Any four ASCII characters Function Code 3 Any two ASCII characters One of these bar codes Disable Code 49 Enable Code 49 4 CJ0 CJ1 Scan Configuration Command Reference To disable any of the function codes scan one of these bar codes Disable Function Code 1 Disable Function Code 2 4 CK S4 CL Disable Function Code 3 CM To set one of the function codes to a character string 1 Scan one of these bar codes Enter Accumulate Mode Set Function Code 1 CK Enter Accumulate Mode Set Function Code 2 4 CL Enter Accumulate Mode Set Function Code 3 4 CM 2 Scan any character from the Full ASCII Bar Code Chart in Appendix B You can define two characters each for Function Codes 1 and 3 and four characters for Function Code 2 3 Scan this bar code Exit Accumulate Mode _ 8 21 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Code 93 Pur
127. ate a cabled laser scanner Default Disabled no timeout Syntax SAdata Acceptable values for data are 0 Disabled 1 60 Shutoff time in seconds Scan 1 Scan this bar code Enter Accumulate Mode Change Scanner Timeout 4 4 SA 2 Scan a numeric value for data from these bar codes ATA MU Q 1 ALMA MUU J 3E NNN MU 4 5 AA AT 6 47 MU ALMA Q Q 8 60 Configuration Command Reference 3 Scan this bar code Exit Accumulate Mode _ Scanner Trigger Purpose Scanner trigger allows you to set level triggering or edge triggering e With level triggering you activate the scanner and the laser turns on and stays on until you release the button or the trigger on a cabled scanner e Inedge triggering you activate the scanner and the laser turns on and stays on When you activate the scanner a second time the laser turns off Simply releasing the button or the trigger does not turn the laser off If the laser is left on the scanner timeout turns the laser off Default Level triggering Syntax SCdata Acceptable values for data are 0 Level triggering 1 Edge triggering Scan One of these bar codes Enable Level Triggering SC0 Enable Edge Triggering 4 SC1 8 61 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Subnet Mask Purpose Default Syntax Scan Or 8 62 Defines the subnet mask an internal TCP IP proto
128. atus line option is not currently selected the status line will appear if there is a recoverable error A non recoverable error appears directly on your display and your TE session ends You must follow the instructions on the terminal display to continue with your session If the Model 200 Controller detects an error and ends the session you will see a controller error message on the terminal display Record this error message and pass it on to your network administrator or contact your local Intermec service representative The 3270 5250 and VIXXX ANSI terminal emulation applications have an error handling routine that detects local editing errors and command handling errors If you have a problem while running your TE application check these possible problems Note Many of the error messages in the next table only apply when running the 5250 TE application Error Message Attn Not Processed 5250 error Digit Only 5250 error DUP Field Required 5250 error Field minus invalid 5250 error Field not in Field Format Table 5250 error Solution The host computer was unable to process your Attention request Press t amp to reset the terminal and try again later You have entered an invalid character in a digit only numeric field Reenter a valid character for this type of field You have pressed a DUP key in a field that does not have the DUP bit enabled Enter a valid command for this type of fiel
129. be reduced Battery life depends on temperature battery model input device age of the battery pack your usage and duty cycle factors If you use the terminal for extended periods of time in sub freezing environments you may need to change the battery pack more often Do not store the terminal in a cold temperature environment When you are not using the terminal keep it in a warmer area to make sure the battery chargers will continue operating If the Battery icon blinks the backup battery charge is low Move the terminal to a warmer environment to charge the backup battery The backup battery charger operates between 32 F and 104 F 0 C and 40 C If you are using the terminal in an area outside this temperature range the backup battery will not charge Store the battery chargers and spare batteries in a warm office environment to assure the most efficient operation Charge the main battery pack in an area or room where the temperature is above freezing If you have been using the terminal in a cold temperature environment and need to replace or charge either battery let the batteries warm up for a half hour before you charge them 6 27 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Booting and Resetting the Terminal 6 28 You seldom need to boot or reset the TRAKKER 2425 terminal When you boot the terminal it runs through power on self test POST to test each major subsystem The terminal uses t
130. ble NiCad backup battery for memory backup e 16 line by 20 character CGA compatible display angled for easy viewing e Adjustable antenna for 2 4 GHz radio frequency communications e Scan module accessories for bar code data collection 1 3 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Accessories for the Terminal 1 4 You can use these accessories with the TRAKKER 2425 terminal Belt Clip The belt clip lets you attach the terminal to your belt and have it hang at your side so you can have both hands free The belt clip snaps around your belt and a Velcro strap holds the terminal to the belt clip Handstrap The elastic handstrap attaches to the back of the terminal to let you hold the terminal easily and securely for long periods of use Holster The holster is a convenient way for you to carry the terminal on your belt when you are not using it The holster attaches to your belt and holds the terminal at your side Module for Cabled Scanners This module has a scanner port that lets you attach a wand laser scanner or CCD scanner for bar code data collection Standard Range Scan Module The standard range laser scan module works as an integrated scanner that lets you scan bar code labels from up to 30 inches away depending on the bar code height and density Vehicle Mount Holder You can attach this holder to a vehicle such as a forklift so that you can securely store the terminal while the vehicle is moving
131. bled Standard Function code 1 Disabled 3 bar start stop label length 2 bar start stop label length Disabled No check digit Check digit HIBC AIAG check digit Discard Retain Location in Configuration Menu Symbologies Menu Codabar option Symbologies Menu Code 11 option Symbologies Menu Code 16K option Symbologies Menu 2 of 5 12 of 5 option Symbologies Menu Code 39 option 3 25 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Bar Code Symbologies Table continued Parameter Syntax Code 39 continued ASCII Code 49 CJ Function Code 1 CK Function Code 2 CL Function Code 3 CM Code 93 CF Code 128 CH Interleaved 2 of 5 CA MSI CN Check digits Plessey CI 3 26 Options Non full ASCII Full ASCII Mixed full ASCII Disabled Enabled None disabled Any two ASCII characters x0D x0A CR LF Any four ASCII characters None disabled Any two ASCII characters Disabled Enabled Disabled Standard UCC EAN 128 Disabled Fixed length Variable length no check digit Case Code check digit Variable length check digit Disabled No check digit 1 modulus 10 check digits 2 modulus 10 check digits Discard Retain Disabled Discard check digit Retain check digit Location in Configuration Menu Symbologies Menu Code 39 option Symbologies Menu Code 49 option Symbologies Menu Code 93 option Symbologies Menu Code 128 op
132. block of memory After the terminal beeps press 9 to suspend Leave the terminal off for at least 1 minute If you suspect that a suspend resume is causing data loss leave the terminal off for several minutes or even several hours If there is a problem the error is easier to detect if the terminal stays in Suspend mode for a longer time Press 0 to resume The terminal again creates a checksum for each 64K block of memory and compares the checksums The results of the test appear on the screen If the CHECKSUMS MATCH message appears suspend resume is preserving the terminal memory and there are no problems If there is a problem the message CHECKSUM ERROR appears with the 64K block number and the checksum value before and after the test If you do get an error contact your local Intermec service representative Caution If the Suspend Resume Test fails stop using the terminal Contact your local Intermec service representative Conseil Si le test Suspend Resume choue veuillez ne plus utiliser le terminal Contactez le repr sentant du service client le Intermec de votre r gion Reader Command Reference Reader Command Reference This chapter describes the reader commands that you can use while operating the terminal Reader commands such as Backlight On allow you to perform a task on the terminal Using Reader Commands A reader command causes the terminal to perform a task Some reader commands temporarily overr
133. code both of the labels above as a Mixed full ASCII interprets any valid full ASCII character pairs that appear in the label but does not require that all data be encoded with a valid full ASCII character pair If you are uncertain how your labels are encoded configure the terminal for mixed full ASCII which decodes all valid Code 39 labels If you configure the terminal for Code 39 full ASCII you should check for Code 39 mixed full ASCII Mixed full ASCII does not apply when you configure the terminal for non full ASCII Note The interpretive text shown under bar code labels does not always accurately reflect the data that is encoded in the label The interpretive text represents how the label should be decoded 8 17 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Code 39 continued Default Syntax Scan Use this table to help configure your terminal Code 39 Option Bar Code Label Decodes Non full ASCII A A D E A D E A Full ASCII A No decode D E A a Mixed full ASCII A a D E A a Enable Code 39 Full ASCII with no check digit 111 CBdata Acceptable values for data must be three digits corresponding to First digit 0 Disabled 1 Enabled with no check digit 2 Enabled with check digit 3 HIBC Health Industry Bar Code 4 With AIAG check digit Second digit 0 Discard check digit 1 Transmit check digit Third digit 0 Code 39 non full ASCII 1 Code 39 full ASCII 2 Code
134. col stack variable that is used to separate the subnetwork address from the local IP address The TCP IP protocol stack performs a bit wise AND on the IP address and the subnet mask Each address segment represents one byte where 255 converts to FF hex The default subnet mask 255 255 255 0 means the terminal uses a standard IP network mask For example if the IP address is 192 009 150 184 and the subnet mask is 255 255 255 0 the subnetwork address is 192 009 150 X 255 255 255 0 NSn n n n where each n address segment is a number from 0 to 255 The subnet mask field consists of four separate numbers each separated by a period To set the default subnet mask address scan this bar code Default Subnet Mas 4NS255 255 255 To set the subnet mask 1 Scan this bar code Enter Accumulate Mode Set Subnet Mask NS Configuration Command Reference 2 Scan a numeric value from 0 to 255 to set an n field of the subnet mask address from these bar codes Q Pad g 4 I5 6 ETE Q 4Q 3 Scan this bar code Period 4 Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to set the next two numbers in the subnet mask address field After you scan the last address segment go to Step 5 Do not scan the period after the last address segment 5 Scan this bar code Exit Accumulate Mode _ 8 63 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Te
135. conventions defined xx command conventions defined xxi guide to learning tasks 1 32 keypad conventions defined xix manuals list for reference xxii screen and message conventions defined xx documentation continued shipping box list of contents 1 5 summary of each chapter xvii warnings and cautions defined xvi domain See RF domain double high text configuring 3270 and 5250 5 9 VTXXX ANSI 5 20 Duplicate command 5250 TE 9 22 E EAN 8 enabling 8 70 EBCDIC display exceptions 5 30 keys 3270 and 5250 9 22 edge triggering configuring the scanner 8 61 editing keys VIXXX ANSI keypad finding on 5 17 list of 10 3 to 10 6 End command 3270 and 5250 9 5 VTXXX ANSI 10 3 Enter 3270 and 5250 command 9 6 reader command using 7 7 Enter Accumulate mode configuration commands using 8 5 reader commands using 7 6 Enter TE Configuration Menu command 9 6 entering data chart of key sequences 2 10 configuration commands using 8 5 keypad using 2 6 reader commands using 7 4 roaming between access points 4 14 scan module using 2 37 terminal locked up 6 7 6 30 TRAKKER 2400 Menu System using 3 10 environmental specifications A 3 to A 6 equipment required for network 4 6 Erase Input command 3270 and 5250 9 6 Erase to End of Field command 3270 TE 9 7 Error Logger screen defined 6 42 Index I error messages 3270 and 5250 TE 6 15 to 6 17 audio signals list of 2 18 Communications
136. creen defined 6 40 Battery Monitor screen defined 6 44 Battery Status screen defined 6 45 Beeper Test screen defined 6 46 Clear Task Profiles screen defined 6 41 Destructive RAM Test screen defined 6 47 Diagnostics Menu using 6 37 Display Test screen defined 6 48 Error Logger screen defined 6 42 Hardware Configuration screen defined 6 49 Keypad Test screen defined 6 50 Radio Test screen defined 6 51 RS 232 Loop Back screen defined 6 52 Scanner Test screen defined 6 53 Subsystem Versions screen defined 6 55 summary of 6 35 Suspend Resume screen defined 6 56 Task Status screen defined 6 43 tests and screens defined 6 39 to 6 56 TRAKKER 2400 Menu System using 6 36 dimensions of the terminal A 3 display adjusting from the keypad 2 13 backlight on and off 7 9 backlight timeout configuring 8 34 contrast adjusting 2 14 8 36 conventions defined xx EBCDIC exceptions 5 30 icons Battery 2 17 2 34 Caps Lock 2 15 Connect 2 16 Ctrl 2 15 Data 2 17 Function Left 2 15 Function Right 2 15 Radio 2 16 Shift 2 15 Viewport 2 17 overview of using 2 11 specifications A 4 status line described 5 13 text size configuring 3270 and 5250 5 9 VTXXX ANSI 5 20 troubleshooting 6 48 viewport using 2 12 5 30 Display Backlight Timeout command 8 34 Display Contrast command 8 36 Display Test screen defined 6 48 disposing NiCad backup battery 2 33 documentation bar code
137. d You have pressed the Field key in a non numeric field Use the Field Exit or Field key The cursor is not positioned correctly in a data input field Position the cursor correctly and try again 6 15 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Problems Using Terminal Emulation Applications continued Error Message FM Field Required 5250 error Function not implemented 5250 error Help Not Processed 5250 error Invalid control sequence Mandatory field 5250 error Monocase Only 5250 error No more room for insert Numeric Only Parameter error 5250 error Protected Field Roll Down Not Processed 5250 error 6 16 Solution You have pressed a Field Mark key in a field that does not have the DUP bit enabled Enter a valid command for this type of field You have pressed an unsupported function key or entered an invalid key sequence Try the function again using the correct key sequence The host computer was unable to process your Help request Press t amp to reset the terminal and try again You have pressed an unsupported function key or entered an invalid key sequence Reenter a valid key sequence You have attempted to bypass a mandatory data entry field using a Field Field or Field Exit key Enter data in the field You have entered an invalid character in a monocase only field Reenter a valid character for this type of field You
138. d Connector pin 2 places 242XU 082 4 Hook the slots on the bottom of the battery pack into the slots on the bottom of the battery compartment 5 Slide the battery pack toward the top end of the terminal until it fits and locks into the connectors inside the bottom case The battery pack must be all of the way forward to close the battery door 1 10 Getting Started fi Installing the Battery Pack 242XU 102 6 On the inside of the battery door make sure the rubber bumper is installed over the ridge near the wall The rubber bumper keeps the battery pack in place Rubber bumper TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 7 Hook the bottom edge of the battery door into the bottom case above the backup battery compartment Push the door down to close it over the battery compartment Push the battery door latch down and slide it toward the top end of the terminal to lock the door in place Battery door 242XU 088 Note If the battery door will not shut the battery pack is not correctly installed Remove the battery pack and repeat Steps 2 through 6 to install the battery pack 1 12 Getting Started fi Charging the Backup Battery You must fully charge the backup battery The main battery pack charges the backup battery when required with the terminal turned on or off Note The backup battery charger operates between 32 F and 104 F 0 C and 40 C If you are using t
139. d data from the T2425 terminal display The keypad locks automatically when you send this command or any other AID command When the host computer grants permission to send data the keypad unlocks This key is useful for finding out if the host computer is free before you attempt to transmit data For 5250 terminals this key sequence prompts the host system to display the Operational Assistant Menu Keypad f x Scan Attention ATTN 9 3 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 9 4 Backtab Backtab moves the cursor back to the most recent first field position If the cursor is in the middle of a field Backtab moves it to the first position of the same field If the cursor is at the first position of a field Backtab moves it to the first position of the preceding input field Keypad Backtab BTAB Clear This command clears the T2425 display and moves the cursor to the home position This is an AID key For 5250 terminals this command sends the clear AID X BD function to the host computer which then clears the keyboard Keypad f w Clear CLR 3270 and 5250 TE Command Reference Cursor Home Cursor Home is one of two home commands Cursor Home moves the cursor to the first input position on the terminal screen and moves the viewport to that position If you want to move the viewport to the upper left corner of the terminal screen wi
140. d mode maximizes the life of the main battery pack s power Make sure the battery pack is charged not in a low battery state You are operating the terminal and the main battery pack charge becomes low The Battery icon remains on solid Press 0 to put the terminal in Suspend mode Remove the main battery pack and insert another charged battery pack For help see Main Battery Pack earlier in this chapter You are operating the terminal and the backup battery charge becomes low The Battery icon blinks Press 0 to put the terminal in Suspend mode Keep a charged main battery pack installed in the terminal The battery pack will fully charge the backup battery in approximately 18 hours Note If you use the terminal in a cold temperature environment battery life will be reduced For more information see Guidelines for Managing Batteries in Chapter 6 2 35 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Learning About the Terminal s Memory 2 36 The terminal comes with the following memory Flash memory Provides 2MB of flash memory for long term storage of user applications terminal emulation or screen mapping application Intermec firmware and configuration data RAM memory Provides 512K RAM system memory and an additional 512K RAM for user applications The contents of RAM are saved when you change the main battery pack RAM is erased when you reset the terminal or ch
141. d then press to execute the command or option Note You can press at any time to display an online help screen Press to exit a help screen 3 9 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 3 10 Filling In Fields and Marking Check Boxes Screens list the options for each configuration parameter diagnostic or system option Below each option name is either a toggle field or an entry field e Ina toggle field you press lt 4 P or to view the options for that field e Inan entry field you type a value into the field To edit the data in an entry field use the lt 4 P _f or keys Ona terminal emulation keypad you can also use the Delete and Insert keys to edit an entry field For example the Code 49 Code 16K screen has toggle and entry fields The Code 49 field is a toggle field Press to toggle between Enabled and Disabled The Function Codes field for F1 F2 and F3 are entry fields You type a value into the field for each function code CODE 49 CODE 16K Code 49 DEER Code 49 Function Codes Fi F2 x D x A F3 Code i6K Etandard OK CANCEL 242XU 052 Some screens contain check boxes Check boxes are used when more than one option can be selected at one time To mark or clear check boxes e Press gt For example to disable the Backlight reader command choose the Backlight check box and press to clear the check bo
142. dard Range Scan Module e Scanning Options 2 37 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 2 38 Installing a Scan Module To use the terminal you must have a scan module installed on the terminal The scan module is usually installed at the Intermec factory You may want to change the scan module and install another type of scan module on the terminal Use these instructions to remove and install the scan module Note Observe all static electricity precautions before installing a module To install a scan module 1 Make sure the terminal is off and then lay it face down on a clean and sturdy work surface 2 Use a Phillips screwdriver and remove the three screws that secure the scan module to the terminal 3 Remove the existing scan module from the terminal 4 To install the module align the module guides with the guides on the terminal see illustration Gently press down on the module to seat the connector guide pins and the module connector into the connector on the terminal Note The module guide pins and connector should fit easily into the connector on the terminal DO NOT force the module into the connector or you may damage the module connector the terminal connector or both 5 Insert the three screws into the module and tighten them to secure the scan module to the terminal Learning How to Use the Terminal 2 Installing a Scan Module Scan module guide 2 places Ter
143. ddress assigned to the Model 200 Controller Terminal IP Address An IP address is a network level address you assign to each device in a TCP IP network The Terminal IP Address identifies the IP address assigned to the T2425 terminal The IP address you set on the terminal must match the address that is set on the controller RF Domain The domain defines a logical partition or subnetwork of the network To establish communications you must assign the same domain number to every RF device in a wireless network The domain number you set on the terminal must match the domain that is set on each access point the terminal may communicate with You can continue to collect data with the terminal as you roam in between access points as long as all the devices have the same domain number RF Security Identification ID This optional parameter defines the password you can set for secured transmission and receipt of data between devices in the wireless network To communicate each access point and terminal must have matching security IDs If the security ID is set on the 0100 Access Point you must also set the security ID on each terminal that may communicate with the access point Note You can only set the RF security ID with the 2 4 GHz network enabled The Network Activate command must be configured to 2 4 GHz RF Network before you can save any changes to the RF security ID parameter 4 9 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manua
144. e Booting and Resetting the Terminal later in this chapter You insert a main battery pack The The main battery is completely discharged of power The terminal will not turn on and the terminal does not even register enough power to identify a Battery icon is not displayed main battery pack and display the Battery icon Replace the main battery pack with a spare charged battery pack or charge the battery pack You see both these symptoms The main battery pack charge is low You have a few minutes of power left Replace the main battery pack with a e The Battery icon remains on solid y spare charged battery pack or charge the battery pack e The terminal beeps once every 15 seconds Troubleshooting Problems While Operating the Terminal continued Problem The Battery icon blinks on the top line of the terminal display Note The terminal is not beeping You see both these symptoms e The Battery icon blinks e The terminal beeps once every 15 seconds Solution The backup battery charge is low or the backup battery is not connected Make sure the backup battery wire connectors are firmly locked together Check the wires leading into the backup battery and into the bottom case for any damage or loose connections Make sure a main battery pack is installed and connected Turn off the terminal Let the main battery pack charge the backup battery The backup battery will be fully charged in approximat
145. e Terminal in a Network ae In the TRAKKER 2400 Menu System choose System Menu and then choose Load Default Values Default Configuration te Note You will not hear a beep after scanning the Default Configuration label 7 11 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Multiple Read Labels Purpose From Network Keypad Label Syntax Example 7 12 A multiple read label is a Code 39 or Code 93 bar code label that has a space as the first character after the start code The terminal stores a multiple read label in the buffer until you execute a command to transmit the label or scan a regular label A regular bar code label is executed as soon as you scan it If you use a configuration command or the TRAKKER 2400 Menu System to disable multiple read labels the terminal processes the bar code label as a regular label and reads and decodes the space as data Not supported Not supported lt Start Code gt lt SP gt data lt Stop Code gt where lt SP gt is the ASCII space character and data is the content of the label Multiple read bar code label A After you scan a multiple read bar code label the accumulated data appears on the bottom line of the terminal display You can use the Accumulate mode commands such as Backspace or Clear to accumulate data Once you scan a non multiple read label the data is entered Reader Command Reference Reset Firmware Purpo
146. e are additional screens to view For example the text More or in the lower right hand corner of the display indicates that you can press a Roll Up key to view additional information e A Roll command received from a host application moves the screen but not the viewport You can see the screen scroll through the viewport when you roll up or down but the viewport itself remains stationary e Paging keys viewport page up viewport page down viewport page right viewport page left are used to move the viewport within one screen they do not move the screen itself For help on the Roll keys and paging keys see Chapter 9 3270 and 5250 TE Command Reference For help on the Roll command see the IBM 5494 Remote Control Unit Functions Reference Troubleshooting Troubleshooting This chapter lists the problems you may have while using the terminal and gives some possible solutions You will also find instructions that explain how to replace the antenna clean parts of the terminal and run diagnostic tests How to Use This Chapter If you have any problems with the TRAKKER 2425 terminal use this table as a guide to find the problem and solution in this chapter Problem Display is blank Terminal locked up Message displayed Configuring the terminal Communications error TE application error Screen mapping application error Scanning labels Battery management Boot Menu appears or terminal l
147. e battery pack using the Battery Status diagnostic test For help see Running Diagnostics in Chapter 6 If you have been using the terminal in a cold temperature environment and need to replace or charge the battery pack let the battery packs warm up for a half hour before you charge them Store the battery chargers and spare battery packs in a warm office environment Caution Removing the battery pack while the terminal is on may cause loss of data Conseil Ne d tachez pas le jeu de piles pendant que le lecteur est actif car cela pourrait entrainer la perte de donn es To remove the battery pack 1 Press to turn off the terminal 2 Open the battery door by pushing down on the battery door latch and sliding it toward the bottom end of the terminal Lift up the top edge of the battery door to remove it Note If you have a handstrap installed stretch the handstrap s elastic band to allow the T bar to slide out of the T bar opening on the bottom end of the terminal Move the handstrap out of the way to open the battery door Learning How to Use the Terminal Opening the Battery Door Battery door 242XU 079 3 Disconnect the battery pack from the connectors inside the bottom case by sliding the battery pack toward the bottom end of the terminal 242XU 103 2 21 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 4 Tilt the terminal to one side and let the battery pack drop out of the c
148. e for VT100 and ANSI terminals Keypad Page Up f 9 Page Down ia Page Right t 6 Page Left t 4 Scan Page Up PGUP e Down PGDN Page Right Page Left PGLT 10 5 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 10 6 Previous Screen Keypad t a Scan Previous Screen PREV Remove Keypad f m Scan Remove MACACA REM Select Keypad f P Scan Select SEL VT100 220 320 and ANSI TE Command Reference Program Function Keys When you press a program function key or scan its bar code you send the data on the display to the host and the TRAKKER 2425 terminal performs the function you specified on this data The software application you are using determines the function of each editing key Refer to your application user s manual for information about the editing key functions Note VT100 terminals only support function keys to Function Key Bar Code EN F1 AMI TAA F1 F2 F2 F3 0 F3 F4 F4 O F5 O F5 F6 oF6 10 7 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Program Function Keys continued Function Key Bar Code Ie F UNO NN F7 F8 F8 F9 F9 DO F10 F10 GATA F11 F11 DE F12 F12 f e F13
149. e module for cabled scanners If the laser scanner did turn on in the first test try scanning a bar code label To scan a label press the Scan button on a standard range scan module or pull the trigger on a laser scanner attached to the module for cabled scanners If the laser scanner turns on the Scan button or laser scanner trigger is working correctly If the laser scanner does not turn on you may have a problem with the Scan button on the terminal or the laser scanner trigger on the attached laser scanner For help with scanner problems contact your local Intermec service representative 6 53 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Defining the System Diagnostics Screens Each system diagnostic screen is defined in this section Access Point Purpose Use the Access Point screen to get version and address information about the 0100 Access Point the terminal is communicating with across the 2 4 GHz network Where Available System Diagnostics menu Sample Screen ACCESS POINT Radio ROM Ver U1 6EB Radio MAC Addr 862 6A6306516 Access Point Mame SHIPPING Access Point MAC B8626A6301365 CEsecl Exit 242XU 139 Definition The screen displays the radio ROM firmware version radio MAC machine address the access point name and the access point MAC If you have a problem with the radio or the connection to the access point use the information on this screen to troubleshoot your network
150. e polarity enabled You must use an interface cable to connect the input device to the module For help contact your local Intermec service representative If you are using the J7010 imager you need to use a wedge interface cable P N 062168 and set the Cable ID parameter on the J7010 to the Force 97xx Wedge option For help see the TRAKKER 2400 Series Module for Cabled Scanners Instruction Sheet P N 064219 001 Terminal Specifications 4 Default Configuration The next table shows the terminal s default configuration You can use the TRAKKER 2400 Menu System to set the terminal to the default configuration For help see Restoring the Terminal s Default Configuration in Chapter 3 Default Configuration for Bar Code Symbologies Parameter Default Codabar Disabled Code 11 Disabled Code 16K Disabled Code 2 of 5 Disabled Code 39 Full ASCII Code 39 enabled with no check digit Code 49 Disabled Code 93 Disabled Code 128 Standard Interleaved 2 of 5 Disabled MSI Disabled Plessey Disabled UPC EAN UPC A EAN 13 enabled UPC E and EAN 8 enabled supplementals allowed transmit check digit transmit number system digit and retain leading zero for UPC A A 7 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual A 8 Default Configuration for Communications Parameter Controller IP Address Default Router Network Activate Network Loopback RF Domain RF Security Identification RF Wa
151. ead Learning How to Use the Terminal 2 Scanner Selection Identifies the type of scanner you have connected to the TRAKKER 2425 terminal module for cabled scanners The terminal can optimize the scanning performance by using the scanner you define in this command Scanner Timeout Defines the maximum length of time the scanner stays on each time you press the Scan button or activate the cabled laser scanner Scanner Trigger Allows you to set the triggering to level or edge triggering With level triggering you activate the scanner and the laser turns on and stays on until you release the Scan button or the trigger on a cabled scanner In edge triggering you activate the scanner and the laser turns on and stays on until you activate the scanner a second time or the scanner timeout turns the laser off There are several ways to set the scanner commands on the terminal For help configuring the terminal see Chapter 3 Configuring the Terminal For help using the scanner configuration commands see Chapter 8 Configuration Command Reference 2 43 Configuring the Terminal Configuring the Terminal 3 This chapter explains how to configure the terminal discusses the terminal s configuration parameters describes how to restore the default configuration and concludes by listing the configuration parameters How to Configure the Terminal You can configure the TRAKKER 2425 terminal by using either of the methods
152. eature and type all alphabetic 242xU 117 disable Caps Lock the icon disappears af Function Left This icon appears when you press f The key is stored in the keypad buffer until you press another ee cee ee key When you press a second key the key combination is 242xU 112 entered into the terminal and the icon disappears Function Right This icon appears when you press f The key is stored in the keypad buffer until you press another key When you press a second key the key combination is 242xU 113 entered into the terminal and the icon disappears 2 15 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Understanding the Icons continued 242XU 116 242XU 109 2 16 Radio This icon appears when the Network Activate command is disabled or there is a problem with the radio card and it is turned off The Radio icon disappears when the network is enabled and the radio is on and transmitting For help see Chapter 4 Operating the Terminal in a Network Connect This icon contains an asterisk and tells you if the terminal is connected via RF communications to the 0100 Access Point and the Model 200 Controller Ifthe Connect icon is not displayed the terminal is not connected to the access point You may be out of range of an access point or the terminal may not be configured correctly If the Network Activate command is disabled the Connect ic
153. ecoded bar code to retain accuracy checksum A calculated value that is used to test data integrity Errors can occur when data is transmitted or when it is written to disk One means of detecting such errors is the use of a checksum A value is calculated for a given chunk of data by sequentially combining all the bytes of data with a series of arithmetic or logical operations After the data is transmitted or stored a new checksum is calculated and compared with the original one If the checksums match the transmission or storage was probably error free If they do not match an error occurred Glossary G coaxial A type of cable used to connect the Model 200 Controller directly to an IBM host Coaxial cable consists of an outer layer of insulation an outer conductor another insulating layer and a central conductor Codabar A self checking discrete bar code symbology that has these 16 characters in its set 0 to 9 dollar sign colon slash period plus and minus Codabar is commonly used in libraries blood banks and air parcel express applications The American Blood Commission ABC Codabar requires that you retain the start stop code digits when processing a Codabar symbol The maximum density for a Codabar symbol is 12 8 characters per inch Code 11 A very high density discrete numeric bar code developed by Intermec The character set includes the numbers 0 through 9 and the dash character
154. een RS 232 LOOP BACK RECEIVING CTS a CEscl Exit 242XU 144 Definition The RS 232 test begins immediately If the RS 232 hardware is functioning correctly the terminal displays WAITING and then RECEIVING If there is a problem an error message appears The status information on the screen is updated every 500 ms Note Once the RS 232 port is available on a future model on the T2425 terminal you would contact your local Intermec service representative to report an error found during this test 6 52 Scanner Test Purpose Where Available Sample Screen Definition Troubleshooting Use the Scanner Test to make sure the laser scanner Scan button or scanner trigger are operating correctly You can test the standard range scan module or the scanner attached to the module for cabled scanners Hardware Diagnostics menu SCANNER TEST Press ENTER to turn the laser on for 3 seconds Or scan a label to test the laser CEnter Execute test CEsel Exit 242XU 137 To start the test press If the laser scanner turns on the scanner is working correctly If the laser scanner does not turn on you may have a problem with the scan module or the laser scanner attached to the module for cabled scanners If you are using a module for cabled scanners make sure you are using a laser scanner that is supported on the terminal Also check to make sure the laser scanner is attached to th
155. een defined 5 22 Terminal screen defined 5 20 Viewport screen defined 5 23 Telnet terminal types listed 5 3 temperature batteries checking 6 44 operating and storage range A 4 terminal using in cold areas 6 27 template screen mapping downloading from the controller 5 26 entering data in a screen 5 27 requesting new 5 28 terminal See TRAKKER 2425 terminal terminal display See display 1 16 terminal emulation application options 5 3 A 4 commands list of 3270 and 5250 9 3 to 9 16 C 5 to C 9 VTXXX ANSI 10 3 to 10 6 C 11 to C 13 display exceptions 5 30 icons using to monitor 4 12 keypad options 2 4 A 4 RF communications using 4 11 session problems establishing 6 14 starting 1 25 5 4 TE Configuration menu using 5 8 5 19 troubleshooting applications 6 15 to 6 17 6 18 to 6 22 unsupported functions 5 25 verifying network communications 1 26 1 28 viewport using 2 12 5 30 See also 3270 and 5250 terminal emulation See also screen mapping See also VTXXX ANSI terminal emulation terminal IP address configuration command 8 64 configuring 1 22 defined 4 9 Terminal mode VT220 320 5 21 Terminal screen configuring 3270 and 5250 5 9 VTXXX ANSI 5 20 terminal type VTXXX or ANSI selecting 5 20 terminology defined xviii Test and Service Mode reader command 7 15 text size configuring 3270 and 5250 5 9 VTXXX ANSI 5 20 TFTP defined 4 21 to 4 23 time and date configuration command
156. eld UPC EAN code A fixed length numeric continuous bar code symbology that uses four element widths A terminal that is configured to decode EAN bar codes can decode UPC but the reverse is not true UPC code is a subset of EAN code It is anumeric 12 digit bar code symbology used extensively in retail particularly the grocery industry The character set is 0 to 9 Its maximum character density is 13 8 numeric characters per inch upline A device that is at the computer end of a connection between a computer and a device is referred to as being upline When devices are connected to a computer they are connected in a line Upline is a direction relative to the device in contrast to downline If more than one computer is connected in a line the upline computers usually handle data processing and the downline computers usually handle data collection and sometimes data preprocessing Glossary G validation file An ASCII file that has one entry per line A validation file is used to ensure that the information entered in the input fields of a screen mapping screen are correct The file is read sequentially and the last line in the ASCII file must be lt EOF gt variable length A type of symbology in which the number of characters per symbol is not restricted Opposite of fixed length viewport A method for viewing a full size terminal screen 25 lines x 80 characters with the terminal s 16 x 20 d
157. eld Exit code in the edit box which now shows this command and value S AEU 4 Choose Download to download the commands and change the runtime configuration of the terminals selected When you configure the terminal from the controller the configuration changes are saved in RAM but not in flash memory You must use the TRAKKER 2400 Menu System to save the configuration in flash memory For help see Saving Configuration Changes in Flash Memory in Chapter 3 You can set the postamble or preamble to any character from the extended ASCII character set using these instructions Find the literal ASCII value and type that value in Step 3 instead of the Field Exit code To set the preamble use the syntax AD instead of AE 5 15 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Using VT100 220 320 or ANSI Terminal Emulation 5 16 Your TRAKKER 2425 terminal contains a special keypad and firmware that provide most of the commands available to emulate a VT100 220 320 or ANSI terminal You can use your T2425 terminal to e emulate VT100 220 320 and ANSI keyboards by using the scan module or the keypad e run host applications using the VT100 220 320 or ANSI terminal emulation features After you have installed the terminal in your system you need to learn how to configure and use the terminal emulation application The next sections cover these topics e Using the VIXXX ANSI keypad e Configuring VTXXX ANSI T
158. ely 18 hours If you have been using the terminal in a cold temperature environment move the terminal to a warmer environment to charge the backup battery If the backup battery will not charge you may need to replace it For help contact your local Intermec service representative The main battery pack charge and the backup battery charge are both low Immediately turn off the terminal Replace the main battery pack with a spare charged battery pack Let the main battery pack charge the backup battery The backup battery will be fully charged in approximately 18 hours If you have been using the terminal in a cold temperature environment move the terminal to a warmer environment to charge the backup battery If the backup battery will not charge you may need to replace it For help contact your local Intermec service representative TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Problems While Configuring the Terminal You can configure the terminal by using the TRAKKER 2400 Menu System or by scanning configuration commands If you have problems configuring the terminal check these possible problems and solutions Problem Solution You see this error message when The 2 4 GHz network is enabled and there is a problem with exiting the Configuration Menu the network configuration There are four possible problems to check and fix in the Communications Menu Communications Menu f configuration error e The terminal
159. em or by scanning these bar code labels For help see Chapter 3 Configuring the Terminal or Resume Execution in Chapter 8 Troubleshooting Resume Execution Not Allowed Resume Execution Allowed ERO ER1 Using the Boot Menu The Boot menu appears after you e remove both batteries install them again and turn on the terminal e upgrade the firmware e reset the terminal BOOT MEHU b Boot System 1 Run Loader qa Power Down POWER DOWN IN 6 SEC 242XU 104 The Boot Menu contains these commands Boot System If you did remove the batteries make sure you install a charged main battery pack or the terminal will not turn on Press 8 to boot the terminal Once the terminal is finished booting your TE application or screen mapping application appears on the display Run Loader Press to load the terminal firmware To upgrade or load the firmware you should use the Firmware Upgrade option in the TRAKKER 2400 Menu System For help see Upgrading the Firmware in Chapter 3 Power Down Press to turn off the terminal When you turn on the terminal the Boot Menu screen appears if POST passes 6 29 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Resetting the Terminal If the terminal or application is locked up and the terminal will not respond to any key sequences you can reset the terminal Before you re
160. ent date in the format YY MM DD with a space character between each field and then press V The program fills in the slash character in the date field For example to enter the date August 9 1996 type 9 e off al o 9 W Press to save the changes and exit the Time and Date screen Press to exit the System Menu The Main Menu appears Continue with the next procedure to set the required network parameters 1 19 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Setting the Network Parameters In this procedure you activate network communications and set your controller and terminal IP addresses You also need to set the RF domain and RF security identification password For a detailed definition of these parameters see Chapter 4 Operating the Terminal in a Network To set the network parameters 1 Press W to choose the Configuration Menu and then press The Configuration Menu appears Note If you are not in the TRAKKER 2400 Menu System press f 7 2 to access the Main Menu CONFIGURATION MEHU Eumbologies Menu Terminal Menu N Select item CEnter Next screen CFil Help CEse Exit 242XU 010 2 Press W to choose the Communications Menu and then press The Communications Menu appears 1 20 Getting Started fi Communications Menu COMMUNICATIONS MEHU Primar He
161. epair or adjust energized equipment alone under any circumstances Someone capable of providing first aid must always be present for your safety Firstaid Always obtain first aid or medical attention immediately after an injury Never neglect an injury no matter how slight it seems Resuscitation Begin resuscitation immediately if someone is injured and stops breathing Any delay could result in death To work on or near high voltage you should be familiar with approved industrial first aid methods Energized equipment Never work on energized equipment unless authorized by a responsible authority Energized electrical equipment is dangerous Electrical shock from energized equipment can cause death If you must perform authorized emergency work on energized equipment be sure that you comply strictly with approved safety regulations Note For laser compliance and safety information refer to the TRAKKER Antares 2425 Manual Supplement that is shipped with your terminal XV TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual xvi WARNING CAUTION Warnings and Cautions The warnings and cautions in this manual use the following format Warning A warning alerts you of an operating procedure practice condition or statement that must be strictly observed to avoid death or serious injury to the persons working on the equipment Avertissement Un avertissement vous avertit d une proc dure de fonctionnement d une m
162. eps Four low beeps Low beep high beep low beep high beep Click Low beep every 15 seconds 2 18 Description You entered a valid command or the data you entered was stored You entered valid data the terminal decoded a label or the terminal decoded the last row of a two dimensional symbology You entered or scanned an invalid command or data When you boot the terminal you hear four low beeps once the power on self test POST has executed successfully You hear this beep sequence when POST failed and did not execute successfully For help see Problems While Operating the Terminal in Chapter 6 When you press a key the terminal sounds a click You can disable the keyclick For help see Keypad Clicker in Chapter 8 The terminal also clicks while you are scanning a two dimensional symbology Code 16K or Code 49 bar code label The main battery pack is low You need to replace or recharge the battery pack For help see the next section Learning About the Terminal s Batteries Learning How to Use the Terminal 2 Learning About the Terminal s Batteries There are two rechargeable batteries in the TRAKKER 2425 terminal Main Battery Pack This lithium ion battery provides the main power source to operate the terminal Backup Battery This NiCad Nickel Cadmium battery backs up all memory and the real time clock while you change the main battery pack Main Battery Pack The mai
163. er s Manual Defining the Software Diagnostics Screens Each software diagnostic screen is defined in this section Application Events Purpose Where Available Sample Screen Definition 6 40 A programmer can use the current status of each event to help debug applications running on the terminal Choose the Event Group Menu from the Software Diagnostics menu Note There are two additional diagnostics available from the Software Diagnostics Event Group Menu The two diagnostics Network Events and Network Applications will be defined in a future release APPLICATION EVENTS APPLICATION EVENTS NO SELECT 8 60 COM2 TX SELECT COM1 SELECT 9 06 NET TX SELECT COM2 SELECT 16 6 TIME SELECT RES ERVED NET SELECT LABEL SELECT KEYEOARD SELECT COM1 TX SELECT I h On too Heagggges CEnter Next screen CEnter Next screen CEse Exit CEsel Exit 242XU 130 The TRAKKER 2425 terminal uses an event driven architecture All inputs to the terminal such as keypad or from the network arrive in the form of an event You can check the status of each event using the Application Events screen When an event is serviced by the application the event is cleared 0 means the event is cleared 1 means the event has occurred or is set Troubleshooting Clear Task Profile Purpose Clears the task profile counters so that you can begin accumulating statistics on the firmware subsystem tasks from a known po
164. er address that is assigned to each device in a TCP IP network keypad buffer An area of memory that saves a limited number of operator keystrokes keypad clicker A feature that makes the terminal produce an audible click every time you press a key This feature can be enabled or disabled with the Keypad Clicker configuration command LAN Local area network A group of intelligent workstations that are hooked together to allow them to share data printers and other devices LANs are usually used over a small geographic area G 13 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual G 14 laser scanner An optical bar code reading device that uses a low energy laser light beam to examine a spatial pattern one part after another It then generates analog or digital signals corresponding to the pattern Laser scanners are often used in mark sensing pattern recognition character recognition and bar code recognition The laser scanner converts bar code symbols to electrical signals for input to a bar code reader decoder for processing and subsequent output through a data communications interface LCD Liquid crystal display A display comprised of groups of transparent anisotropic liquid segments that are switched between two transparent electrodes Application of an electric field across a segment changes the reflectivity of the liquid and it becomes opaque LED Light emitting diode A semiconductor that produces light at a
165. er aPrsason EXIT Note Do not choose to exit the terminal emulation program If you do accidentally exit TE you may see an error message on the status line Clear the error and continue Not supported Changes the Input mode to Line mode Not supported Changes the Input mode to Character mode 10 11 Terminal Specifications Terminal Specifications 4 This appendix lists the terminal s physical and environmental specifications lists the default configuration and provides a configuration command reference list in alphabetical order by command syntax Physical and Environmental Specifications You can use the tables in this section to find technical information about these features and options Terminal Dimensions Power Specifications Temperature Specifications Relative Humidity Specifications Display Keypad Options Application Options Memory Radio Frequency Communications Network Support Bar Code Symbologies Scan Module Options Standard Range Scan Module Optical Parameters Terminal Dimensions Length 10 6 in 26 5 cm Height 2 8 in 7 0 cm Width 3 2 in 8 0 cm Weight 27 oz 765 45 g including the main battery and backup battery Power Specifications Operating Rechargeable lithium ion battery pack 1000 to 1350 mAh available Memory Backup Rechargeable NiCad 110 mAh battery A 3 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual A 4 Temperature Specifications You need to o
166. erminal or group to which you want to download the configuration commands For help on configuring a group of terminals see the Model 200 Controller System Manual Note You can continue running an application on the TRAKKER 2425 terminal while configuring the terminal from the controller 4 15 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 4 16 2 Choose the option to enter a command 3 Enter the reader or configuration command and choose Add The command appears in the Files and Data box For example enter this command to set the Beep Volume to very loud S BV4 For a list of reader commands see Chapter 7 Reader Command Reference For a list of configuration commands see Chapter 8 Configuration Command Reference Note You can set the Postamble or Preamble command to use characters from the extended ASCII character set such as the Field Exit code for 5250 TE For help see Auto Advancing Through Fields on 5250 TE Screens in Chapter 5 4 Repeat Step 3 to add another reader or configuration command or choose OK 5 Choose Download to download the commands and change the runtime configuration of the terminals selected When you remotely configure the terminal the commands change the terminal s runtime configuration The configuration changes are not saved in flash memory You must use the TRAKKER 2400 Menu System to save the configuration in flash memory For help see Saving Configurat
167. erminal User s Manual Time and Date Purpose Default Syntax Scan 8 66 Sets the time and date on the terminal 960101120000 DBdata Acceptable values for data are 12 digits corresponding to yy 00 99 Year mm 01 12 Month of the year dd 01 31 Day of the month hh 01 12 Hour mm 00 59 Minutes ss 00 59 Seconds To set the time and date 1 Scan this bar code Enter Accumulate Mode Set Time and Date 4 DB 2 Scan a numeric value for each digit from these bar codes ATA A Q n DNI MUA 43 MUTA MU 4 5 AU A 6 STF Q 3 Scan this bar code Exit Accumulate Mode _ Time in Seconds Purpose Default Syntax Scan Configuration Command Reference Q If you enable the Append Time command you can enable the Time in Seconds command to append the seconds to each transaction transmitted from the terminal To append the time in hours and minutes disable the Time in Seconds command Disabled DAdata Acceptable values for data are 0 Disabled 1 Enabled One of these bar codes Disable Time in Seconds DAO0 Enable Time in Seconds DA1 8 67 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual UDP Port Purpose Default Syntax Scan Or 8 68 Defines the UDP port that the UDP Plus network protocol uses for communications in your 2 4 GHz network The UDP port you set on the TRAKK
168. ers in Chapter 3 Note You can set the preamble to use characters from the extended ASCII character For help see Auto Advancing Through Fields on 5250 TE Screens in Chapter 5 Default No characters disabled Syntax ADdata Acceptable values for data are up to 25 ASCII characters When you enter the AD command without data the preamble is disabled If you are entering quotation marks as data or grouping configuration commands you need to enclose the data within quotation marks see the example Note To scan a bar code label that includes quotes you must configure the terminal to use Code 39 in Full ASCII mode For help see Code 39 earlier in this chapter Scan To disable the preamble scan this bar code Disable Preamble AD Or To set the preamble to an ASCII character string 1 Scan this bar code Enter Accumulate Mode Set Preamble 4 4AD 8 48 Example Configuration Command Reference 2 Scan a value for data from the Full ASCII Bar Code Chart in Appendix B The preamble can be from 1 to 25 characters 3 Scan this bar code Exit Accumulate Mode _ You want to set a preamble that includes quotation marks Enter the preamble by scanning this full ASCII bar code label Set Preamble to B S4 AD B You must enclose the data within quotation marks and precede each quotation mark with another quotation mark so that the quotat
169. es operating system requests such as input output requests into a format that is recognizable by specific hardware such as adapters EAN European Article Numbering International standard bar code for retail food packages corresponding to the Universal Product Code UPC in the United States A terminal that is configured to decode EAN bar codes can decode UPC but the reverse is not true UPC code is a subset of EAN code EBCDIC Extended Binary Coded Decimal Interchange Code EBCDIC is a standard eight bit code developed by IBM Contrast with ASCII end device The device in the data collection system that you use to collect and enter data edge triggering A scanner trigger configuration that makes the laser turn on after you activate the scanner and stay on until you activate the scanner a second time Simply releasing the Scan button or trigger on a cabled scanner does not turn the laser off If the laser is left on the scanner timeout turns the laser off Contrast with level triggering error message A message from a device or program advising the user of an error that requires intervention to solve For example if you receive the error message Unable to establish connection to host Session ended when you turn on the terminal you may need to configure the terminal ESD Electrostatic discharge Transient rapid transfer of charge between bodies at different electrostatic potentials e caused by direct co
170. essfully the LEDs are lit in a green color The LEDs turn off after 2 seconds unless you start scanning another label Note Some of the scanning options described in the next section allow you to scan multiple bar code labels without having to press the Scan button each time The yellow LEDs stay lit any time the scanner laser beam is on 4 Release the Scan button Learning How to Use the Terminal 2 Scanning Labels With the Standard Range Scan Module Scanner LED indicators 2 places 242XU 034 To successfully read a bar code label the laser beam in the scan module must see all the bars in a label and a quiet zone at each end of the label A quiet zone is a clean non printed space a er Se Quiet zone before and after bar code aa H 242XU 076 2 41 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 2 42 With the standard range scan module you will have the best success if you hold the terminal so that the horizontal reading angle is near zero and the vertical reading angle is near 20 degrees To get the best scan angle hold the terminal so that the scan module is pointing toward bar code label Tilt the terminal up or down slightly 20 degrees You can also watch the laser beam The laser beam becomes the brightest at the best scan angle Optimum scan angles vary with the type and printing quality of the bar code label the distance of the terminal from the label and
171. ex I characters capitalizing 2 8 chart for entering characters 2 10 conventions defined xix cursor keys using 2 9 key code values displaying 6 50 options described 2 4 A 4 Scan button using 2 40 screen mapping illustrated 2 5 special keys finding 2 4 typing characters 2 6 using 2 4 to 2 9 VTXXX ANSI illustrated 5 18 C 10 using 5 17 Keypad Caps Lock command 8 39 Keypad Clicker command 8 40 Keypad mode VTXXX ANSI 5 21 Keypad Test screen defined 6 50 L labels See bar code labels laser scanner See scan module LEDs scanning bar code labels 2 40 troubleshooting 6 25 letters bar code labels to scan B 11 B 12 level triggering configuring the scanner 8 61 lights See LEDs Line mode configuring for VTXXX ANSI 5 22 10 11 Load Default Values screen using 3 22 Loader Waiting screen troubleshooting 3 24 loader using the Boot Menu 6 29 lock up troubleshooting 6 7 6 30 Login screen illustrated 1 26 5 4 lowercase letters bar code labels to scan B 12 M Main Board Menu using 6 44 6 46 6 47 Main Menu options defined 3 6 manual audience and purpose described xvii guide to learning tasks 1 32 summary of each chapter xvii terminology defined xviii I 11 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual manuals list for reference xxii memory described 2 36 flash saving configuration changes 3 15 RAM saving configuration changes 3 14 saving configuration
172. exclamation point asterisk Press the Key s fJ 3 f 7 fl 7 fJ 4 HE6 f 9 or f w fy ENEC I H f x _f 7 f R f P or f A 1 J 2 j 3 j 4 ANJI 5 z Nj 8 Learning How to Use the Terminal 2 How to Use the Terminal s Display Icons to monitor the terminal status You can use the TRAKKER 2425 terminal s display to view data run terminal emulation applications monitor the terminal s status and for many other functions The terminal s black and white display is 16 lines by 20 characters and is CGA compatible First Name Address City Age Ae HoT 242XU 122 CGA compatible display shows 16 lines by 20 characters Backlight key You can use these features of the display In an application use the terminal s display as a viewport to see a full size terminal screen of 25 lines by 80 characters Adjust the display s backlight contrast and audio signal volume from the keypad Use the terminal s icons to monitor the status of special keys battery power RF and network communications and viewport movement Each display feature is explained in the next sections Note If you are using the terminal in a cold en
173. f 3 Page Right f 6 Page Left fj 4 Scan Page Up PGUP Page Down PGDN e Right PGRT Page Left 3270 and 5250 TE Command Reference 9 Reset 3270 terminals only Reset unlocks the keypad if it is locked due to an error and will clear the status line of most error messages You cannot use the Reset command when the T2425 is communicating with the host computer Keypad f ese Scan Reset RST Roll Up and Roll Down 5250 terminals only Roll up and roll down are AID keys that the T2425 sends to the host to request additional screens The host transmits a new screen display in response to this command The new screens allow you to view data either above or below what appears on the display Do not confuse the Roll Up and Roll Down AID keys with the Roll command Hex 23 received from a host application For help on the Roll command see Using the Roll Keys in Chapter 5 Keypad Roll Up f R Roll Down f s Roll Up ROUP Scan Roll Down RODN 9 13 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 9 14 Scroll Viewport Keys Use these commands to move the viewport one line or character up down right or left To select a specific cursor key press one of the arrows on the edges of the oval shaped cursor key Keypad Viewport Up A Viewport Down Vv Viewport Left lt Viewport Right gt Scan Viewport Up UP
174. figuration Menu Communications Menu Primary Network option Communications Menu Advanced Network option Communications Menu Primary Network option Communications Menu Advanced Network option Communications Menu RF Driver option Communications Menu RF Driver option Communications Menu RF Driver option Communications Menu Advanced Network option Communications Menu Primary Network option Communications Menu Advanced Network option Configuring the Terminal 3 Terminal Operations Table Parameter Syntax Append Time DE Auto Shutoff EZ Beep Volume BV Decode Security CS Display Backlight Timeout DF Display Contrast DJ Keypad Caps Lock KA Keypad Clicker KC Postamble AE Preamble AD Reader Commands DC Options Disabled Enabled 0 disabled 2 75 minutes Off Quiet Normal Loud Very loud Low Moderate High Disabled 0 1 60 seconds 10 seconds 0 7 3 On Off Disabled Enabled None no characters Any 25 ASCII characters None no characters Any 25 ASCII characters Disable all reader commands Enable all reader commands Enable override Disable override Location in Configuration Menu Terminal Menu Append Time option Terminal Menu Power Management option Terminal Menu Beeper option Terminal Menu Scanner option Terminal Menu Display option Terminal Menu Display option Terminal Menu Keypad option
175. figuration commands Automatic mode See Scanner mode automatic shutoff A terminal configuration feature that defines the maximum time the terminal stays on when there is no activity At automatic shutoff the contents of terminal memory are saved and the terminal resumes when it is turned on again backlight A light built into the terminal display to make it easier to view the display in dimly lit environments backup battery See NiCad backup battery Glossary G bandwidth The size in hertz of the frequency range that a signal transmission occupies Typical narrow band signals occupy a 25 KHz bandwidth The 2 4 GHz radio frequency signal occupies a 1 MHz bandwidth bar code density Number of data characters that can be represented in a linear unit of measure Bar code density is often expressed in characters per inch bar code label A label that contains a bar code symbol bar code symbology A scheme for encoding data as bar code Code 39 UPC EAN Interleaved 2 of 5 and Codabar are examples of different symbologies battery pack See lithium ion battery pack boot Usually means to invoke a bootstrap process which involves building up a system from some simple preliminary instructions or information A boot invokes the BIOS boot sequence clears all memory and performs a complete power on self test POST to ensure that the hardware and peripherals are operational A boot initializes the system hardware for use b
176. from the Model 200 Controller For help see the Model 200 Controller System Manual e You can have the T2425 terminal request a validation file from the Model 200 Controller To request a validation file from the controller 1 From the template screen menu press to download a new file 2 Type the name of the validation file you want to use when the screen prompts you to enter a file name Note Make sure that your filename contains a valid file extension The filename cannot have the TPL extension or the screen mapping application will try to load the validation file as a template File name 242XU 060 3 Press to download the validation file from the controller 5 29 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Using the Viewport 5 30 When you start your application you see all or part of a host screen on the TRAKKER 2425 terminal display This section describes how you view other parts of the host screen on the terminal display The 16 x 20 display screen of the T2425 terminal only shows part of each 25 x 80 screen that appears on a standard terminal screen You can use the T2425 display as a viewport to access the full screen by using the paging keys described in this section Note There are several display exceptions for non EBCDIC keypad characters when you are working in TE mode Brackets display as parentheses The character cannot be used in TE mode How the Viewport
177. g Diagnostics in Chapter 6 CAUTION Learning How to Use the Terminal 2 Note The backup battery charger operates between 32 F and 104 F 0 C and 40 C If you are using the terminal in an environment that is outside this temperature range the backup battery will not charge Move the terminal to a warmer environment to charge the backup battery To fully charge a discharged backup battery 1 Install a fully charged main battery pack For help see Removing and Installing the Main Battery Pack earlier in this chapter 2 The main battery pack charges the backup battery It will be fully charged in approximately 18 hours After you finish charging the backup battery the main battery pack still has most of its power remaining Note The backup battery charges enough to operate the terminal within 20 minutes However the backup battery will only provide limited backup power if it is not fully charged Removing and Installing the Backup Battery The backup battery should provide years of backup battery power and you will seldom need to replace it You can remove and replace the backup battery if it will no longer hold a charge or the battery is dead Call your local Intermec service representative to order a new backup battery Caution When you replace the backup battery all data stored in RAM is lost Conseil Lors du remplacement de la batterie de secours toutes les donn es stock es dans la m moire vive RAM so
178. g How to Use the Terminal 1 28 Getting Started 1 Turning the Terminal On and Off The terminal s Suspend Resume key is the key in the upper left corner of the keypad as shown in this illustration Suspend Cc C4 Resume key Oo a Vo Enter CS G F10 ovko 242XU 045 When you press to turn off the terminal the terminal does not actually shut off but goes into a Suspend mode This mode is referred to as off in the rest of this manual In Suspend mode the terminal saves all memory and turns off the power to most of the hardware When you press 9 to turn on the terminal the terminal either resumes exactly where it was when you turned it off or the terminal boots and restarts your application Resume is controlled through a parameter or command called Resume Execution For help see Resume Execution in Chapter 8 If you change the main battery pack while the terminal is turned off the terminal resumes or boots the next time the terminal is turned on The backup battery saves all memory while you change the main battery pack 1 29 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Enabling Bar Code Symbologies Bar Code Symbology Codabar Code 11 Code 16K Code 2 of 5 OR enable Interleaved 2 of 5 I 2 of 5 1 30 The TRAKKER 2425 terminal can decode several different types of bar code symbologies Each symbology such as Code 39 uses a different sc
179. ggers an auto enter field to send an ENTER to the application and submit the data The user can just scan data and never has to touch the keypad To set this up you need to set the Postamble command to the 5250 Field Exit code However you cannot use the TRAKKER 2400 Menu System nor scan the value using the Postamble configuration command These two configuration methods currently do not support the extended ASCII character set which includes the ASCII equivalents for special 5250 keys such as Field Exit However the terminal does support the extended ASCII character set Running Applications 5 You must configure the postamble to the Field Exit s literal value using the download server on the Model 200 Controller You can use the download server on the controller to configure one or more terminals in the network To configure and use Field Exit as a postamble 1 In the download server on the controller select the terminal or group to which you want to download the Postamble AE configuration command For help on configuring a group of terminals see the Model 200 Controller System Manual Note You can continue running the 5250 TE application on the T2425 while configuration a terminal from the controller 2 Choose the option to enter a command 3 Type the string AE and then enter the ASCII code 154 by holding down the Alt key while typing 154 on the numeric keypad You should see an U umlaut to represent the literal Fi
180. ging keys a A paging Key roll down keys 0 242XU 033 Use the next sections to learn how to use these keys to move the viewport e Cursor keys e Paging keys e Roll keys 5250 only 5 31 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual To Enter Viewport up Viewport down Viewport right Viewport left 5 32 Using the Cursor Keys Use the cursor keys to move the cursor around the TE screen when you are running a program or entering data gt Cc Cy UJE Enter DODO a w 242XU 042 Cursor keys You can also use the cursor keys to move the viewport when you need to see the next line or column in a TE screen When you move the viewport the cursor does not move Viewport commands are only sent to the terminal not the host computer Press These Keys CA UP aad Ii DN kd Iil RT aa iil LF Or Scan This Bar Code Description Moves the viewport up one line or row Moves the viewport down one line or row Moves the viewport one character to the right Moves the viewport one character to the left Running Applications 5 Using the Paging Keys You can use paging keys to move around a TE screen on the TRAKKER 2425 terminal Paging keys move the terminal display to the next adjacent area or page on the TE screen A page is 16 lines by 20 characters These paging keys move the display as a viewpo
181. harging the Main Battery Pack 2 25 Backup Battery 2 26 Charging the Backup Battery 2 26 Removing and Installing the Backup Battery 2 27 Disposing of the NiCad Backup Battery 2 33 Checking the Power Remaining in the Batteries 2 33 Recognizing a Low or Discharged Battery 2 34 Managing Your Battery Power 2 35 Learning About the Terminal s Memory 2 36 Using the Scan Module 2 37 Installing a Scan Module 2 38 Using the Standard Range Scan Module 2 40 Scanning Options 2 42 iv Contents Configuring the Terminal How to Configure the Terminal 3 3 Learning About Configuration Parameters 3 3 Choosing the Symbologies the Terminal Decodes 3 4 Specifying How the Terminal Will Communicate 3 5 Controlling How the Terminal Will Operate 3 5 Configuring the Terminal With the Menu System 3 6 Exploring the Configuration and System Menus 3 7 Selecting Menus and Commands 3 9 Filling In Fields and Marking Check Boxes 3 10 Entering ASCII Control Characters 3 12 Exiting Screens and Saving Changes 3 14 Exiting the Configuration Menu 3 14 Exiting the TRAKKER 2400 Menu System 3 15 Configuring the Terminal by Scanning Bar Codes 3 17 Saving Configuration Changes in Flash Memory 3 19 Restoring the Terminal s Default Configuration 3 21 Upgrading the Firmware 3 23 Recording Your Terminal s Configuration 3 25 Operating the Terminal in a Network How the TRAKKER 2425 Fits Into Your Network 4 3 Installing and Configuring the Terminal 4 6 Plan
182. he configuration currently saved in flash memory Once the terminal is finished booting your TE application or screen mapping application appears on the display You only reset the terminal when the terminal or an application are locked up and will not respond to any key sequences The terminal also boots and resets after a firmware upgrade or if you remove both batteries The next instructions explain how you boot and reset the terminal Booting the Terminal You can boot the terminal using these two methods e Configure the key to boot the terminal when you turn on the terminal e Use the Boot Menu Booting the Terminal on Resume When you press 9 to turn off the terminal it turns off and goes into Suspend mode When you press to turn on the terminal it resumes or boots depending on the terminal configuration There are two ways to configure the 9 key using the Resume Execution configuration command Resume Execution Not Allowed Configures the terminal to boot and restart your TE application or screen mapping application each time you press to turn on the terminal Use this option if you want to restart your application every time you turn on the terminal Resume Execution Allowed Configures the terminal to resume exactly where it was when you turned off the terminal Use this option to resume working each time you turn on the terminal You can configure the Resume Execution command by using the TRAKKER 2400 Menu Syst
183. he network is disabled no RF communications are provided and the radio is turned off Note You must enable the Network Activate parameter to use the terminal for data collection Disabled NAdata Acceptable values for data are 0 Disabled 1 2 4 GHz RF network enabled One of these bar codes Disable Network Activate 4 NA0 Enable 2 4 GHz RF Network NA1 8 43 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Network Loopback Purpose Default Syntax Scan 8 44 Transmits all messages received from the Model 200 Controller back to the controller Messages received by the radio are not passed on to the terminal applications unless they are configuration commands Messages continue to be looped back to the controller as long as this feature is enabled Messages originating from the terminal are still transmitted to the controller Use the Network Loopback parameter to troubleshoot RF communications problems Disabled NLdata Acceptable values for data are 0 Disabled 1 Enabled One of these bar codes Disable Network Loopback NLO Enable Network Loopback NL1 Plessey Purpose Default Syntax Scan Configuration Command Reference Enables or disables decoding of Plessey symbology Plessey code is pulse width modulated like most other bar codes It includes a start character data characters an eight bit cyclic check digit a term
184. he terminal in an environment that is outside this temperature range the backup battery will not charge To charge the backup battery 1 Install a fully charged main battery pack For help see Installing the Main Battery Pack earlier in this chapter 2 Leave the terminal turned off and let the main battery pack charge the backup battery The backup battery will be fully charged in approximately 18 hours After you finish charging the backup battery the main battery pack still has most of its power remaining Note The backup battery charges enough within 20 minutes to operate the terminal However the backup battery will only provide limited backup power if it is not fully charged 1 13 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Configuring the Controller and Access Point The TRAKKER 2425 terminal can communicate with a host computer in Intermec s 2 4 GHz network through the 0100 Access Point the Model 200 Controller and your Ethernet network Host N TRAKKER 2425 terminals 0100 Access Point Ethernet Model 200 Controller 242XU 095 Note All devices in the 2 4 GHz network must have an IP address All access points that the TRAKKER 2425 may communicate with must be in the same IP subnetwork For help see Chapter 4 Operating the Terminal in a Network To use your T2425 terminal in Intermec s 2 4 GHz network you must first install the Model 200 Co
185. heme for encoding data as bar code You must configure the terminal to decode the type of bar code symbology used in your bar code labels Only enable the bar code symbologies that you need to scan For more information about each symbology and the configuration options see Chapter 8 Configuration Command Reference The terminal can decode the bar code symbologies shown in the next table You can scan the bar code labels in the table to enable a symbology Note Only three symbologies Code 39 Code 128 and UPC EAN are enabled when you unpack the terminal Enabled To Enable the Symbology No Enable Standard Codabar ABCD Start Stop Code CD21 No Enable Code 11 With Two Check Digits CG2 No Enable Standard Code 16K CP1 No Enable Code 2 of 5 3 Bar Start Stop Label Length of 1 CC001 No Enable 2 of 5 Variable Length With a Check Digit CA99 Bar Code Symbology Code 39 Code 49 Code 93 Code 128 MSI Plessey UPC EAN Enabled YES YES YES Getting Started fl To Enable the Symbology Enable Code 39 Full ASCII With No Check Digit CB111 Enable Code 49 CJ1 Enable Code 93 CF1 Enable Standard Code 128 CH1 Enable MSI Without Check Digits CN10 Enable Plessey With Reverse Start Code CI10 Enable UPC A EAN 13 UPC E EAN 8 CE1111111 1 31 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s
186. ices If you cannot get the terminal to communicate with other devices in the 2 4 GHz network check these possible problems Problem The Radio icon on the terminal display remains on The Connect icon is not lit on the terminal display The Connect icon blinks on the terminal display Solution Either the Network Activate command is disabled or there is a problem with the radio card and it is turned off Make sure the Network Activate command is enabled Use the TRAKKER 2400 Menu System or scan the Network Activate command to enable the 2 4 GHz network and turn on the radio For help see Network Activate in Chapter 8 If the network is enabled and the Radio icon remains on there may be a problem with the radio card For help contact your local Intermec service representative The terminal is not connected to the 0100 Access Point Make sure the access point is turned on and operating You may also be using the terminal out of the RF range of an access point Try moving closer to an access point to re establish communications Make sure the terminal is configured correctly for your network To communicate with the access point the RF domain and RF security ID on the terminal must match the values set for all access points the terminal may communicate with For help see Installing and Configuring the Terminal in Chapter 4 The terminal is trying to establish communications
187. ide the configuration settings and some actually change the configuration settings For example you can turn the backlight on to easily view the TRAKKER 2425 terminal s display when you are working in a dimly lit environment You can execute reader commands by e scanning a command from a Code 39 or Code 93 bar code label e pressing keys on the keypad or choosing a command from the TRAKKER 2400 Menu System e sending a command from a device on the 2 4 GHz network such as the Model 200 Controller There are two general types of reader commands Accumulate mode commands and operating commands The reader commands are listed in alphabetical order within these two categories You will find the purpose syntax and bar code labels for each reader command in this chapter TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Using Accumulate Mode You can use Accumulate mode to collect data from a series of bar code labels and enter them as a single label When you put the terminal in Accumulate mode the terminal will collect all scanned bar code labels in the terminal s buffer until you scan either the Enter or Exit Accumulate mode command As you accumulate the data from bar code labels the data is visible on the bottom line of the display You can edit the accumulated data with the Backspace Clear and Enter commands Backspace This command deletes the last character from the current data record you are accumulating Cle
188. iguration command must include the command syntax and the value for the command For example BV is the command syntax for Beep Volume and the value 4 sets the beep volume to very loud If you set one configuration command to a string of ASCII characters and another configuration command follows you must enclose the value in quotes If you do not include the quotation marks the terminal will interpret everything after the first command as data and will not find the second configuration command For example to set the preamble to BV use ADBV no quotes are needed To set the preamble to BV and turn off the beep volume use AD BV BVO or change the order and use BVOADBV To clear the preamble and postamble from a single label use AD AE Note To scan a Code 39 bar code label that includes quotes you must configure the terminal to use Code 39 in Full ASCII mode For help see Code 39 in Chapter 8 To include quotation marks when you set a value the entire value must be enclosed in quotation marks Type two sets of quotation marks to include one quotation mark as the value for a command For example to set the preamble to ABC D use AD ABC D When you scan bar code labels you change the terminal s current runtime configuration The changes are not saved in the terminal s flash memory To save the changes in flash memory use the TRAKKER 2400 Menu System For help see the next section Saving Configurati
189. ination bar and usually a reverse start character The code is continuous and not self checking You need to configure two parameters for Plessey code Start Code and Check Digit Disabled Cldata Acceptable values for data are 00 Disabled 10 Plessey with reverse start code 30 Transmit check digit 31 Discard check digit To disable Plessey Disable Plessey CI00 To set Plessey complete these steps 1 Scan this bar code Plessey With Reverse Start Code CI10 2 Scan one of these bar codes to transmit or retain the check digit Transmit Check Digit Discard Check Digit CI30 CI31 8 45 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Postamble Purpose Sets the postamble that is appended to any data you scan with the terminal Common postambles include cursor controls such as tabs or carriage return line feeds For help on using the TRAKKER 2400 Menu System to configure the Postamble see Entering ASCII Control Characters in Chapter 3 Note You can set the postamble to use characters from the extended ASCII character set such as the Field Exit code for 5250 TE For help see Auto Advancing Through Fields on 5250 TE Screens in Chapter 5 Default No characters disabled Syntax AEdata Acceptable values for data are up to 25 ASCII characters If you enter the AE command without data the postamble is disabled If you are entering quotat
190. inch Code 93 A variable length continuous bar code symbology using four element widths It can be used interchangeably with Code 39 when higher density printing is required The character set is the same as Code 39 Its maximum density is 14 8 characters per inch Code 128 A very high density alphanumeric symbology that supports the extended ASCII character set It is a variable length continuous code that uses multiple element widths Code 128 s high density makes it useful when printing data in a limited space Its maximum density is 12 1 alphanumeric characters per inch or 24 2 numeric characters per inch Code One A two dimensional matrix symbology that is useful for applications such as small parts labels that do not have sufficient space for linear bar codes In addition to data storage and error correction symbols each Code One symbol contains a set of horizontal lines in the center called a finder pattern that helps bar code scanners quickly locate and identify each symbol Code One symbols also contain vertical reference bars to help bar code scanners locate the relative positions of each data bit configuration The selected parameters that determine the operating characteristics of an electronic device configuration command A configuration command changes the way the terminal operates You can enter a configuration command by typing on the keypad by scanning a bar code label or by sending a command from a device on
191. ins on solid you have a low main battery pack replace or charge the battery pack as soon as possible e When you remove a low main battery pack from the terminal recharge the battery pack you just removed e Ifthe terminal turns off due to a low main battery pack do not turn on the terminal Replace or charge the main battery pack before you continue using the terminal e Use the battery charger to charge the main battery pack Charge the main battery pack for a minimum of 2 hours to make sure the battery pack is fully charged Backup Battery e If you have a low backup battery turn off the terminal Insert a fully charged main battery pack The main battery pack will fully charge the backup battery in approximately 18 hours e ALWAYS turn off the terminal BEFORE you remove the backup battery Storing the Terminal e If you are going to store the terminal for less than 2 weeks keep both batteries installed in the terminal Insert a fully charged main battery pack before you store the terminal Storing the Terminal continued Cold Temperatures Using the terminal in sub freezing environments Troubleshooting If you are going to store the terminal for more than 2 weeks save your data and end your TE or screen mapping session to minimize the risk of data loss Remove both the main battery pack and the backup battery from the terminal If you use the terminal in a cold temperature environment battery life will
192. installed e A maximum of 3 days if a main battery pack is not installed The backup battery power depends on how much power is left in the battery pack and the backup battery when you turn off the terminal If the backup battery is still providing backup power when you turn the terminal back on the terminal resumes exactly where it was when you turned it off or restarts your application If you plan to store the terminal for a long period of time insert a fully charged main battery pack to maximize battery life Store the terminal in a warm office area to make sure the backup battery continues to charge Note If Resume Execution is allowed the terminal will resume the application when you turn on the terminal Otherwise the terminal boots and the application restarts For help see Resume Execution in Chapter 8 Charging the Backup Battery The main battery pack charges the backup battery when required with the terminal turned on or off The terminal continuously monitors the backup battery voltage level and charges the backup battery for a fixed duration of time whenever the voltage level gets low If the main battery pack is low or discharged it will not be able to charge the backup battery There are two ways to find out if the backup battery charge is low e The Battery icon is blinking on the top line of the display e Check the status of the backup battery using the Battery Status diagnostic test For help see Runnin
193. int in time Where Available Software Diagnostics menu Sample Screen CLEAR TASK PROFILES Operating system task profile counters have heen cleared CEse Exit 242XU 132 Definition When you select the Clear Task Profiles option the terminal clears the Time field on the Task Status screen 6 41 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Error Logger Purpose Where Available Sample Screen Definition 6 42 You can use the Error Logger screen to display any errors that the system could not fix while you were using the terminal For help solving an error contact your local Intermec service representative Software Diagnostics menu ERROR LOGGER Current Time 231912 Time Err Address 824461 BOGI 98000545 024359 OGZ 98000545 024358 BOGI 98000545 CEnter Next screen CEsecl Exit 242XU 134 The Error Logger screens shows the last 30 errors Press to see the next screen of errors The first column displays the time in HHMMSS The second column displays the error number The third column displays the address or segment offset of the program call that was made to the error logger Task Status Purpose Where Available Sample Screen Definition Troubleshooting A programmer can use the Task Status screens to view the task base address and the percentage of time a task has been running Software Diagnostics menu SLOT ADDRESS BOs on oo i ty
194. ion Changes in Flash Memory in Chapter 3 Operating the Terminal in a Network 4 Configuring the Terminal From the Host Computer You can use the host computer to configure one TRAKKER 2425 terminal in your 2 4 GHz network For example you may want to change the Beep Volume command and the Display Backlight Timeout command To send and receive configuration data you need to write an application for the host computer that can communicate with the Model 200 Controller For help see the Model 200 Controller Technical Reference Manual You use the Terminal Message Format TMF protocol in the 2 4 GHz network to send and receive transactions between the host application and the terminal When you remotely configure the terminal from a host application the commands change the terminal s runtime configuration The configuration changes are not saved in flash memory You must use the TRAKKER 2400 Menu System to save the configuration in flash memory For help see Saving Configuration Changes in Flash Memory in Chapter 3 Note You can continue running an application on the TRAKKER 2425 terminal while configuring the terminal from the host computer To set up the Model 200 Controller e Configure a destination name for the host application Create a transaction ID NGCFGRSP that will be routed to this destination name The controller uses the transaction ID to route responses from the terminal back to the host application N
195. ion marks are not treated as the end of the data 8 49 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Resume Execution Purpose Default Syntax Scan 8 50 Defines the way in which the terminal resumes when you press 2 to turn on the terminal If you set this parameter to resume not allowed and you press 9 to turn on the terminal the terminal will boot and restart the default application If you set this parameter to resume allowed and press to turn on the terminal the terminal resumes exactly where it was when you turned off the terminal Allowed ERdata Acceptable values for data are 0 Not allowed 1 Allowed One of these bar codes Resume Execution Not Allowed ERO Resume Execution Allowed ER1 Configuration Command Reference RF Domain Purpose Defines a logical partition or subnetwork of the network To establish communications you must assign the same domain number to every RF device in a wireless network The domain number you set on the T2425 terminal must match the domain that is set on each access point the terminal may communicate with You can continue to collect data with the terminal as you roam in between access points as long as all the devices have the same domain number Default 0 Syntax RWadata Acceptable values for data are any number from 0 to 15 Scan 1 Scan this bar code Enter Accumulate Mode Set RF Domain 4 4 RW 2 Scan a nu
196. ion marks as data or grouping configuration commands you need to enclose the data within quotation marks see the example Note To scan a bar code label that includes quotes you must configure the terminal to use Code 39 in Full ASCII mode For help see Code 39 earlier in this chapter Scan To disable the postamble scan this bar code Disable Postamble AE Or To set the postamble to an ASCII character string 1 Scan this bar code Enter Accumulate Mode Set Postamble AE 8 46 Example Configuration Command Reference 2 Scan a value for data from the Full ASCII Bar Code Chart in Appendix B The postamble can be from 1 to 25 characters 3 Scan this bar code Exit Accumulate Mode _ You want to set a postamble that includes quotation marks Enter the postamble by scanning this full ASCII bar code label Set Postamble to B O ARU BI You must enclose the data within quotation marks and precede each quotation mark with another quotation mark so that the quotation marks are not treated as the end of the data 8 47 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Preamble Purpose Sets the preamble that precedes any data you scan with the terminal Common preambles include a data location number or an operator number For help on using the TRAKKER 2400 Menu System to configure the Preamble see Entering ASCII Control Charact
197. ions TE Configuration Menu A menu driven application that lets you configure 3270 5250 or VTXXX ANSI terminal emulation parameters You can access the TE Configuration Menu at any time during a terminal emulation session Telnet The TCP IP remote terminal protocol for connection to a login server Glossary G terminal emulation TE A device that is running terminal emulation looks like the terminal For example it uses no CPU no RAM and no hard disk Two general classifications are devices running in Character mode and those running in Block mode Character mode devices emulate VTXXX terminals where a character travels all the way from the host to a device and back Block mode devices emulate 3270 or 5250 terminals where entire screens are sent to a device the user fills in all the data fields on the device and sends the entire screen back to the host terminal IP address Identifies the IP address assigned to the TRAKKER 2425 terminal The IP address you set on the terminal must match the address that is set on the Model 200 Controller terminal template A file that contains a menu of screens for data collection devices The template is downloaded to the terminal from the Model 200 Controller or you can use the screen mapping application on the terminal to request the template timeout A defined time allowed for an event after which an alternate action is taken Token Ring A type of LAN that transfers data at either
198. ions in this section If you do have problems with other mechanical parts contact your local Intermec service representative for help Clean the scan module window and display as often as needed for the environment in which you are using the terminal Each procedure is described in detail in this section To order replacement parts contact your local Intermec service representative or contact Intermec at Intermec Corporation 6001 36th Ave West P O Box 4280 Everett Washington 98203 9280 Telephone 1 206 348 2600 6 31 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Replacing the Antenna If your antenna is damaged you can replace it To replace the antenna you need these items e 2 4 GHz SMB antenna Part No 063825 e Retaining ring Part No 064101 e Small straight slot screwdriver To replace the antenna 1 Rotate the antenna to line up the alignment marks on the connector end of the antenna with the alignment marks on the terminal antenna connector 2 Insert the straight slot screwdriver into the retaining ring opening so that the screwdriver is in the retaining ring slot Retaining ring opening Antenna must be in this position 242XU 147 3 Pry the retaining ring up out of the opening and remove it 4 Pull the antenna off the antenna connector on the terminal 6 32 Troubleshooting 5 Line up the alignment marks on the connector end of the antenna with
199. is case the bar code label is processed as described next 1 The Function Code 1 character is not transmitted 2 The three symbology ID characters C1 are transmitted 3 The remaining Code 128 characters are decoded as Standard Code 128 Configuration Command Reference Command Processing Purpose Default Syntax Command processing allows you to disable or enable reader commands For example you can disable the Backlight command There are two ways to enable or disable reader commands e Use the Command Processing configuration command described here e Use the Reader Command Menu option in the Configuration Menu of the TRAKKER 2400 Menu System You may want to disable reader commands to prevent a user from accidentally entering a command or to use data that would otherwise be treated as a command Any Code 39 or Code 93 bar code label that contains the 2 to 4 character commands listed at the end of this section is treated as a reader command unless the command is disabled If you want to disable or enable several commands it is easier to use the menu system For help see Chapter 3 Configuring the Terminal For a description of each reader command that you can enable or disable with Command Processing see Chapter 7 Reader Command Reference All reader commands enabled DCdata Acceptable values for data are 0 Disable all reader commands 1 Enable all reader commands 2 Disable override 3 Enab
200. isplay You will only see 16 lines and 20 characters of data at one time Use the terminal s display as a viewport to move around and see the entire screen volatile Refers to memory that is not saved when power is lost or turned off VTXXX ANSI terminal emulation A straight through terminal emulation that causes Intermec downline devices running terminal emulation to emulate a VT100 VT220 and VT320 or ANSI terminal G 25 Index Symbols key configuring to boot the terminal 6 28 first time turning on 1 15 turning the terminal on and off 1 29 key See backlight key lt 4 A P V keys See cursor keys 1 key See Function Left key t key See Function Right key key See Shift key cent sign command 3270 and 5250 9 22 Numbers 0100 Access Point configuring 4 7 diagnostic screen defined 6 54 roaming between 4 14 verifying network communications 1 27 10Base2 cable drop 4 6 10BaseT cable drop 4 6 2 4 GHz network 0100 Access Point configuring 4 7 activating 1 21 8 43 equipment required 4 6 illustrated 1 14 4 3 to 4 5 installing overview 1 14 4 6 Model 200 Controller configuring 4 7 protocols defined 4 21 to 4 23 roaming between access points 4 14 terminal configuring 4 8 3270 and 5250 screen mapping See screen mapping 3270 and 5250 terminal emulation auto advancing through fields 5 14 bar code labels for commands C 5 to C 9 commands cent sign command 9 22 Attention
201. k Digit Q 71 Optional Scan one of these bar codes to set the sixth digit Discard Number System Digit Transmit Number System Digit Q 1 Note If you discard the number system digit one leading digit is discarded from UPC A UPC E and EAN 8 and two leading digits are discarded from EAN 13 Optional Scan one of these bar codes to set the seventh digit Discard Leading Zero for UPC A Transmit Leading Zero for UPC A Q a d Note This option applies only when you enable UPC A EAN 13 Scan this bar code Exit Accumulate Mode _ 3270 and 5250 TE Command Reference 3270 and 5250 TE Command Reference This chapter lists all of the terminal emulation commands you can use ona TRAKKER 2425 terminal that is running 3270 or 5250 terminal emulation Command Descriptions This chapter contains an alphabetical listing of the 3270 and 5250 terminal emulation commands you can use on the TRAKKER 2425 terminal Each command contains a description key sequence and bar code You will also find program function and program attention keys listed with their bar codes but no description because you program the keys differently for each application Note To scan the bar code labels in this chapter you must configure the terminal to use Code 39 in Full ASCII mode For help see Code 39 in Chapter 8 Attention The Attention key contacts the host and asks permission to sen
202. ker 1 Enable keypad clicker One of these bar codes Disable Keypad Clicker 4 KCO0 Enable Keypad Clicker KC1 MSI Purpose Default Syntax Scan Configuration Command Reference Enables or disables decoding of MSI symbology MSI code is similar to Plessey code MSI code includes a start pattern data characters one or two check digits and a stop pattern Disabled CNdata Acceptable values for data are First digit 0 Disabled 1 No check digits 2 1 modulus 10 check digit 3 2 modulus 10 check digit Second digit 0 Discard check digit 1 Transmit check digit One of these bar codes Disable MSI CNO00 MSI Without Check Digits CN10 MSI With 1 Modulus 10 Check Digit Discard Check Digit CN20 MSI With 1 Modulus 10 Check Digit Transmit Check Digit CN21 8 41 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual MSI continued MSI With 2 Modulus 10 Check Digits Discard Check Digits CN30 MSI With 2 Modulus 10 Check Digits Transmit Check Digits CN31 8 42 Configuration Command Reference Network Activate Purpose Default Syntax Scan Enables or disables network communications between the TRAKKER 2425 terminal and other devices in the 2 4 GHz network When you enable this parameter the terminal attempts to establish communications with the Model 200 Controller When you disable this parameter t
203. keup On Broadcast Subnet Mask Terminal IP Address UDP Port Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Disabled Disabled 0 None No disabled 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 05555 Terminal Specifications 4 Default Configuration for Operations Parameter Append Time Automatic Shutoff Beep Volume Command Processing Decode Security Display Backlight Timeout Display Contrast Keypad Caps Lock Keypad Clicker Postamble Preamble Resume Execution Scan Ahead Scanner Mode Scanner Redundancy Scanner Selection Scanner Timeout Scanner Trigger Time and Date Time in Seconds Default Disabled 0 minutes disabled Normal All reader commands enabled Moderate 10 seconds 3 maximum contrast Caps lock off Enabled No characters disabled No characters disabled Allowed Disabled One Shot mode Normal All compatible scanners see Note below Disabled no timeout Level triggering 9601011200000 Disabled Note The Scanner Selection configuration command is only used when a module for cabled scanners is installed on the TRAKKER 2425 terminal A 9 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Configuration Commands by Syntax The next table lists all of the configuration commands that are available on the TRAKKER 2425 terminal The configuration commands are listed in alphabetic order by syntax Syntax Command For Help See Page ADadata Preamble 8 48 AEdata Postamble 8 46 BVdata Beep Volume 8 8 CAdat
204. l Default Router Provides a software and hardware connection between two or more networks that permits traffic to be routed from one network to another on the basis of the intended destinations of that traffic When the Model 200 Controller is on a different subnetwork than the T2425 terminal you need to set the IP address assigned to the default router The terminal uses the router address to send packets across the network to the controller The default router must have an IP address on the same subnetwork as the terminal The default of 0 0 0 0 means there is no default router Subnet Mask The subnet mask is an internal TCP IP protocol stack variable that is used in IP protocol to identify the subnetwork for an IP address The IP protocol performs a bit wise AND on the IP address and the subnet mask Each address segment represents one byte where 255 converts to FF hex This computation is used to find out if the controller and terminal are on different subnetworks If the terminal is on a different IP subnetwork than the controller then you must set the subnet mask and default router For example if the terminal IP address is 192 9 150 184 and the subnet mask is 255 255 255 0 the terminal is on the subnetwork 192 9 150 0 Operating the Terminal in a Network 4 Using RF Communications on the Terminal Once you have configured the devices in the 2 4 GHz network you can begin using the TRAKKER 2425 terminal application to collect and t
205. l upgrading the firmware Boot Menu using 6 29 Upgrade Firmware screen using 3 24 uppercase letters bar code labels to scan B 11 user defined key VTXXX ANSI 5 21 V validation file downloading 5 29 variable data entering in commands 7 4 8 5 vehicle mount holder terminal accessory 1 4 vertical boundary configuring the viewport 3270 and 5250 5 11 VTXXX ANSI 5 24 vertical jump configuring the viewport 3270 and 5250 5 11 VTXXX ANSI 5 24 vertical reading angle for scanning 2 42 viewport cursor keys using 5 32 described 5 30 Follow Cursor mode configuring the boundaries 5 11 5 23 icon described 2 17 illustration using 5 31 mode configuring 3270 and 5250 5 11 VTXXX ANSI 5 23 movement keys list of 5 31 9 14 10 10 paging keys using 5 33 3270 and 5250 9 12 VTXXX ANSI 10 5 screen configuring 3270 and 5250 5 10 VTXXX ANSI 5 23 using 2 12 5 30 volume adjusting the beep 2 14 8 8 voting Scanner Redundancy command 8 57 1 18 VTXXX ANSI terminal emulation additional functions list of 10 10 C 13 editing keys Backspace 10 3 End 10 3 Find 10 4 Home 10 4 Insert Here 10 4 keypad finding on 5 17 Next Screen 10 4 Paging Keys 10 5 Previous Screen 10 6 Remove 10 6 Select 10 6 summary of commands C 11 to C 13 keypad chart for entering characters 2 10 illustrated 5 18 C 10 using 2 4 to 2 9 5 17 parameters configuring 5 19 program function keys
206. l continued Problem You see this error message when exiting the Configuration Menu Commandname command failed Remainder of configuration not updated You scan a configuration command such as Keypad Caps Lock and you hear three low beeps You scan a configuration command such as Keypad Caps Lock and nothing happens Solution The two character name syntax of the configuration command that failed is listed on the first line of the error message For example you may see this message Ss command failed There may be a problem with the configuration due to a change made with the Scanner Selection SS command Check the command listed in the message To find the command use the Configuration Commands by Syntax table in Appendix A Make sure the command is set correctly for the options and network you are using with the terminal For help see Chapter 8 Configuration Command Reference If you are working in the TRAKKER 2400 Menu System you cannot scan configuration commands Use the Configuration Menu to change the terminal s configuration or exit the menu system to scan configuration commands There are two possible solutions e You may have one or more reader commands disabled such as Change Configuration so that you cannot change the configuration Enable all of the reader commands and try again e The terminal may be waiting for another command to complete the configuration change If
207. l sounds a high beep For help on the configuration commands see Chapter 8 Configuration Command Reference command command command n where command is a configuration command and the value you want to set f 7 2 m to access the TRAKKER 2400 Menu System From the Main Menu choose the Configuration Menu to change the terminal s configuration Change Configuration Turn Off Beep Volume BVO0 The change configuration command is followed by the configuration command to turn off the beep volume BVO Reader Command Reference Default Configuration Purpose From Network Keypad Scan Sets the terminal to its default configuration resets the firmware boots the terminal and starts your terminal emulation or screen mapping application The default configuration for the terminal is listed in Appendix A For help see Restoring the Terminal s Default Configuration in Chapter 3 When you use the Default Configuration command the default configuration is saved in RAM and flash memory The runtime and boot configuration are changed to the default configuration Note When you use the Default Configuration command the Primary Network parameters are set to the default values The terminal will no longer have a valid IP address and cannot communicate with other devices You need to configure the terminal again For help see Chapter 4 Operating th
208. l to communicate with other devices in your network you must set the network parameters radio frequency parameters and address information For example you must set the Controller IP Address so the terminal can transmit data to and receive data from the Model 200 Controller To learn how to configure the terminal to fit into your network see Chapter 4 Operating the Terminal in a Network Controlling How the Terminal Will Operate The operating parameters let you adjust the way the terminal operates By customizing the operating parameters you can set the terminal to automatically shut off after a specified length of time set the terminal to resume applications or restart applications modify data transactions by appending the time modify bar code data by using preambles and postambles enable or disable specific reader commands change the frequency and volume of the beeper or audio signals control the display contrast and backlight timeout enable or disable the keypad clicker and keypad caps lock customize the way the scan module operates by selecting scan ahead data buffering type of scanner device decode security level scanner timeout value and trigger modes 3 5 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Configuring the Terminal With the Menu System The TRAKKER 2400 Menu System is a menu driven application that lets you configure the terminal view system information and run diagnostics
209. lable Sample Screen Definition 6 48 Use the Display Test screen to make sure that every pixel on the display is working correctly For example you may want to test the display if you are not seeing complete characters on the display Hardware Diagnostics menu DISPLAY TEST CEnter Next pattern CEsel Exit 242XU 135 Press to display each of the four patterns After 5 seconds the entire display is filled with the current test pattern Press to display the next pattern The first two patterns appear as a shaded pattern and turn off every other pixel The third pattern turns on every pixel and appears as a black square The fourth pattern turns off every pixel and appears as a clear square If any of these patterns do not display correctly you may have a problem with the display For help contact your local Intermec service representative Troubleshooting Hardware Configuration Purpose If you are discussing a problem with Intermec you can use the Hardware Configuration screen to tell the Intermec representative the exact version of hardware on the terminal You can also use this screen to see the radio frequency and country code that are configured on the terminal Where Available Hardware Diagnostics menu Sample Screen HARDWARE CONFIG HARDHARE CONFIG Country Code PCMCIA Type 2 usA 86 601 PCMCIA Rev 1 Display Type a PCH Rev i Display Rev a Display Cont 32 Keypad Ty
210. le override commando Disable reader command command1 Enable reader command The override option is a temporary setting that allows you to enable all the reader commands for as long as you need them When you want to return to the previous configuration you disable the override Note The Enable Override option is the only bar code label you can scan to enable reader commands if you have disabled all reader commands DCO You can also enable reader commands in the TRAKKER 2400 Menu System 8 25 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Command Processing continued Scan To enable all the reader commands or override the current settings scan one of these bar codes Disable All Reader Commands Enable All Reader Commands 4 DC0 4 DC1 Disable Override Enable Override 4 DC2 4DC3 Or To disable or enable specific reader commands perform these steps 1 Scan this bar code Enter Accumulate Mode Command Processing 4 4 DC 2 Scan the bar code to disable or enable one reader command Note If there are two bar codes for a reader command you must scan them in order left to right Accumulate mode commands are separated into two bar codes so that the command can be accumulated rather than executed as a command Backspace continued LL UA Fo 44 Backlight Change Configuration 0 4G 4 8 26 Clear Default Configuratio
211. managing 2 35 6 26 recording the configuration 3 25 to 3 30 Index I resetting firmware and hardware 6 30 terminology defined xviii troubleshooting guide to 6 3 6 4 turning on the terminal 1 15 troubleshooting 6 5 TRAKKER Antares screen 1 15 transaction header defined 4 18 transaction ID creating 4 17 troubleshooting 3270 and 5250 TE 6 15 to 6 17 antenna replacing 6 32 audio signals list of 2 18 bar code symbologies 1 30 6 6 6 24 batteries 6 26 Boot Menu using 6 29 cleaning the terminal 6 34 configuring the terminal 6 10 to 6 12 diagnostics using 6 35 to 6 56 guide to finding problems 6 3 6 4 Intermec support services xv network communications 1 26 6 13 network loopback using 8 44 operating the terminal 6 6 to 6 9 preventive maintenance 6 31 scanning bar code labels 6 23 to 6 25 screen mapping 6 18 to 6 22 status line messages 5 13 terminal locked up 6 7 6 30 terminal will not turn on 6 5 6 8 turning on the terminal key described 1 29 first time getting started 1 15 troubleshooting 6 5 6 8 typing characters on the keypad 2 6 2 10 U U U U U c EGEO CC EAN Code 128 enabling 8 23 DP Plus defined 4 21 to 4 23 DP Port command 8 68 niversal Product Code See UPC EAN command npacking the terminal 1 5 PC EAN command 8 70 PC A EAN 13 enabling 8 70 PC E enabling 8 70 l 17 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manua
212. mand 8 54 roaming between access points 4 14 Roll Down command 5250 TE 5 35 9 13 Roll Up command 5250 TE 5 35 9 13 router See default router RS 232 Loop Back screen defined 6 52 runtime configuration defined 3 14 3 19 S safety procedures xv disposing of the NiCad backup battery 2 33 laser compliance and precaution information 2 40 saving configuration changes Configuration Menu exiting 3 14 exiting screens 3 14 flash memory 3 19 TE Configuration menu exiting 5 12 5 24 TRAKKER 2400 Menu System exiting 3 15 Scan Ahead command 2 42 8 55 Scan button using 2 40 scan module input devices configuring 8 59 list of A 6 installing 2 38 options described 2 37 A 6 troubleshooting 6 23 to 6 25 using 2 37 window cleaning 6 34 Scanner LEDs See LEDs Scanner Mode command 2 42 8 56 Scanner Redundancy command 2 42 8 57 Scanner Selection command 2 43 8 59 Scanner Test screen defined 6 53 Scanner Timeout command 2 43 8 60 Scanner Trigger configuration command 2 43 8 61 Off reader command 7 15 On reader command 7 14 scanning ASCII characters list of labels B 6 to B 13 bar code labels 3270 and 5250 commands C 5 to C 9 scan module using 2 40 VTXXX ANSI commands C 11 to C 13 button trigger operation configuring 8 56 options defined 2 42 reader commands using 7 14 safety information 2 40 Scan Ahead command configuring 8 55 standard range scan module using 2 40 timeout co
213. mber in the field is separated by a period and can be a number from 0 to 255 Type the address in the format nnn nnn nnn nnn and then press W For example if your Terminal IP address is 192 100 100 3 type 1 2 2 1 0 0 2 1 0j oj 3 Note The network cannot be activated if the first address segment in the IP address is set to 0 127 or a number greater than 223 Press to save the changes and exit the Primary Network screen Press W twice to choose the RF Driver command and then press 4 The RF Driver screen appears RF DRIVER Domain Eecurity ID CID unchanged Hakeup on Broadcast No OK CANCEL 242XU 013 10 11 12 13 14 15 Getting Started fl In the Domain field type a number from 0 to 15 and then press W The domain must match the number set on the access points In the Security ID field type the RF security identification password and then press V The password can be up to 20 characters long and must match the security ID set on the access points Note If you have not changed the Security ID in the current session the words ID unchanged display instead of the actual password If you change the Security ID you see the actual password until you save the changes Press to save the changes and exit the RF Driver screen Note If the terminal i
214. meric value for data from these bar codes Q T 2w g 4 X5 6 TE QE Q 8 51 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual RF Domain continued 3 Scan this bar code Exit Accumulate Mode _ RF Security Identification Purpose Default Syntax Scan 8 52 Defines the password you can set for secured transmission and receipt of data between devices in the network To communicate all 0100 Access Points and TRAKKER 2425 terminals in the subnetwork must have matching security IDs No characters or blank disabled RSdata Acceptable values for data are up to 20 ASCII characters When you enter the RS command without data the RF security ID is disabled or set to no characters blank Note You can only set the RF security ID with the 2 4 GHz network enabled The Network Activate configuration command must be configured to 2 4 GHz RF Network before you can save any changes to the RF security ID command To disable or set the RF security ID to no characters scan this full ASCII bar code label Disable RF Security ID 4RS To set the RF security ID to an ASCII character string Notes Example Configuration Command Reference 1 Scan this bar code Enter Accumulate Mode Set RF Security ID 4 RS 2 Scan a value for data from the Full ASCII Bar Code Chart in Appendix B The RF
215. minal emulation To start the application 1 After you exit the TRAKKER 2400 Menu System this warning screen appears again xe HARNING TE configuration file not found Press a key and a default one will he created 242XU 129 2 Press to continue An introduction screen appears for your application followed by a series of messages The terminal will try to establish communications with the Model 200 Controller and the host computer Once the terminal connects you see the message Connected to Host Note While the terminal is connecting to the controller the terminal ignores any input from the keypad or scanner Wait until the terminal is connected before you try to enter any data 1 25 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual The login or initial screen for each application appears You can begin using the terminal to collect data 3270 5250 Sign On Screen VTXXX ANSI Login Screen Screen Mapping Screen x User Sian en SL ool Pile Name Password 2 ena Program procedure Menu eee Current Library 242XU 014 If the terminal will not connect see Chapter 6 Troubleshooting or the Model 200 Controller System Manual Verifying That the Terminal Is Operating Correctly Once you have configured the terminal your TRAKKER 2425 terminal is ready for operation To verify that the Network Acti
216. minal guide 2 places 242XU 040 2 39 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 2 40 WARNING Using the Standard Range Scan Module The standard range laser scan module emits a beam of laser light that is visible on a bar code label as you scan it The terminal decodes the bar code label and enters the data or command you scanned Warning Do not look directly into the window area or at a reflection of the laser beam while the laser is scanning Long term exposure to the laser beam can damage your vision Advertissement Ne regardez pas directement la r flexion d un rayon laser ou dans la fen tre du laser lorsque celui ci est en op ration Si vous regardez trop longtemps un rayon laser cela peut endommager votre vue To scan a bar code label with the standard range scan module 1 Press to turn on the terminal 2 Hold the terminal at a slight angle a few inches from the bar code label The laser scanner window in the scan module must be pointing toward the label 3 Push the Scan button on the keypad Direct the beam so that it falls across all bars in the bar code label After the terminal successfully reads the label you hear a high beep The scanner stays on or turns off depending on the scanning options you have configured When the scanner laser beam is on both scanner light emitting diodes LEDs at the top of the keypad are lit in a yellow color Once the bar code label is scanned succ
217. mitted to the controller and you can once again transmit data Operating the Terminal in a Network 4 Configuring the Terminal Over the Network You can remotely configure the TRAKKER 2425 terminal by using one of these methods e Send a command from the Model 200 Controller e Send a command from an application on the host computer You cannot configure any of the network parameters such as terminal IP address over the network Once the terminal is communicating you can configure bar code symbologies and operating commands Note You can configure the terminal locally by using the TRAKKER 2400 Menu System or by scanning a command from a Code 39 or Code 93 bar code label For help see Chapter 3 Configuring the Terminal Configuring the Terminal From the Controller You can use the Model 200 Controller to configure one or more terminals in your 2 4 GHz network You can also send reader commands such as Backlight On to one or more terminals This method is very fast and efficient if you need to change the same configuration parameters for several terminals in one area For example you may want to set the Beep Volume to very loud and turn on Keypad Caps Lock for all the terminals in one area Note You can configure a terminal from the Model 200 Controller but you cannot get configuration data from the terminal To send commands from the controller 1 Using the Download Server feature on the controller select the t
218. n ie as Enter Accumulate Mode p Exit Accumulate Mode Reset Scanner Trigger On EA Scan one of these bar codes Disable the Command Q Configuration Command Reference continued continued tJe continued FE Scanner Trigger Off Test and Service Mode Enable the Command Ga ad Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to disable or enable another reader command Note You can accumulate up to 250 characters in the buffer If the data accumulated exceeds 250 characters you will hear an error beep and the terminal will reject the last bar code read 8 27 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Command Processing continued 5 Scan this bar code Exit Accumulate Mode AAAI a Or To disable or enable the ability to scan multiple read labels scan one of these bar codes Disable Multiple Read Labels Enable Multiple Read Labels 4 DC 0 DC 1 8 28 Configuration Command Reference Controller IP Address Purpose Defines the IP address assigned to the Model 200 Controller in your 2 4 GHz network An IP address is a network level address you assign to each device in a TCP IP network The controller IP address you set on the TRAKKER 2425 terminal must match the address that is set on the controller Default 0 0 0 0 Syntax NCn n n n where each n address segment is a number from 0 to 255 The controller IP
219. n Keys continued To Enter F19 F20 F21 F22 F23 F24 Press the Key s I Or Scan This Bar Code F19 MA O I IN NT F20 MONNI F21 MAE ENN F22 UTICA F23 MONN A F2A4 Glossary Glossary G 0100 Access Point A wireless bridge that allows RF packets to go from the Intermec 2 4 GHz RF network to the Ethernet network 10BaseT 10Base2 or 10Base5 An implementation of Ethernet IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers standards to describe the primary characteristics of the cabling system The 10 signifies 10 Mbps Base indicates that the type of signaling used is baseband The T at the end means that twisted pair cable is used The number 2 5 or 10 at the end indicates the maximum cable length in hundreds of meters 3270 or 5250 terminal emulation An application that allows Intermec devices to emulate an IBM 3270 or 5250 terminal Accumulate mode Operating mode in which the terminal stores scanned information in the terminal s data buffer until the terminal receives an Enter command AID Attention identifier A character in a data stream indicating that the user has pressed a key such as Enter requesting an action by the system alphanumeric Character set containing letters numbers and other characters such as punctuation marks
220. n This Bar Code Ka aa AQAA CENT 5250 Only Additional Functions To Enter Press the Keys Or Scan This Bar Code Ea AUC AC DUP iad on AUT FM 3270 Only Additional Functions To Enter Press the Keys Or Scan This Bar Code ee nea AMY A PA1 b AANA A PA2 Cee Ber AN ANTM AA PA3 C 9 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual VT100 220 320 and ANSI TE Command Summary These charts list the keypad sequences and the bar codes you can scan to perform VTXXX ANSI TE functions on the TRAKKER 2425 terminal VTXXX ANSI TE Keypad Use this keypad to enter terminal emulation functions for T2425 terminals running VTXXX ANSI terminal emulation l oo J T C Return E Return 00000 Home amp PgUp Function Left FnL key fea 2 D ka m Ed a o k j pM ao le g 9 H fy fe e 4 Function Right FnR key A B Cc D E t k 1 F6 gt F17 Fig F19 F20 1 J H Re f K L M N ie Jv L Ne R Shift key IOMOoOL 242XU 031 C 10 Terminal Emulation Command Reference C VTXXX ANSI TE Command Summary This chart lists the bar code labels for all VTXXX ANSI terminal emulation commands in alphabetical order
221. n power source for the terminal is a lithium ion battery pack Follow these tips to get the best battery performance and life possible You should always keep a charged main battery pack installed in the terminal to maximize the backup battery s life When you remove a battery pack insert another charged battery pack in the terminal Keep a spare charged battery pack available so you can continue to operate the terminal without interruption If you use the terminal for extended periods of time in a sub freezing environment you may need to change the battery pack more often If you have been using the terminal in a cold temperature environment and need to replace or charge the battery pack let the battery packs warm up for a half hour before you charge them Store the battery chargers and spare battery packs in a warm office environment to assure the most efficient operation 2 19 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 2 20 CAUTION Removing and Installing the Main Battery Pack The battery pack is the main power source for the terminal and it charges the backup battery when required If the main battery pack charge goes low you need to replace it or charge the battery pack as soon as possible There are two ways to find out if the battery pack is low e The Battery icon appears and remains on solid on the top line of the display and the terminal beeps once every 15 seconds e Check the status of th
222. n press before every letter you type or you can enable the Caps Lock feature To enable Caps Lock 1 Press f 2 Press Z The Caps Lock icon appears on the terminal s display 3 Type an alphabetic character The letter appears as an uppercase character on the terminal s display For example press F to type an uppercase letter F Caps Lock remains enabled until you disable it 242XU 046 To type a lowercase letter with Caps Lock enabled e Press and an alphabetic character For example press F to type a lowercase letter f To disable Caps Lock 1 Press f 2 Press Z The Caps Lock icon disappears from the terminal s display 3 Type an alphabetic character The letter appears as a lowercase letter on the terminal s display Note You can also use the Keypad Caps Lock configuration command to enable or disable Caps Lock on the terminal For help see Keypad Caps Lock in Chapter 8 Learning How to Use the Terminal 2 How to Use the Cursor Keys You can press keys to move the cursor around an application screen The terminal s cursor keys work the same as cursor keys on a regular keyboard You use the oval shaped cursor key to move the cursor up down right or left on the display la ea Enter ODDO CSS Oo oa Cursor keys 242XU 042 To Use This Cursor Key Press Arrow up A Arrow down Vv
223. nal User s Manual 3 4 The configuration parameters can be organized into three groups which are discussed in the next sections bar code symbologies communications and general operation When you configure the terminal you are performing one or more of these tasks e Choosing the Symbologies the Terminal Decodes e Specifying How the Terminal Will Communicate e Controlling How the Terminal Will Operate Choosing the Symbologies the Terminal Decodes This list contains all the bar code symbologies the terminal can decode e Codabar e Code 2 of 5 e Interleaved 2 of 5 I 2 of 5 e Code 11 e Code 39 e MSI e Code 128 e Code 49 e Plessey e Code 16K e Code 93 e UPC EAN When the terminal ships only these three symbologies are enabled e Code 39 e Code 128 e UPC EAN If you are using one of the other symbologies to encode your bar code labels you need to configure the terminal and enable the symbology To quickly enable symbologies see Enabling Bar Code Symbologies in Chapter 1 To ensure that the terminal can operate quickly and efficiently you should enable only the bar code symbologies that you are going to scan When you enable each bar code symbology you may need to set a check digit the length of the bar code label or other options For help see Chapter 8 Configuration Command Reference Configuring the Terminal 3 Specifying How the Terminal Will Communicate Before you can use the termina
224. nal and the Model 200 Controller TFTP complies with the standard outlined in RFC 1350 Terminal Message Format is used to route data configuration and network management messages between applications on the T2425 terminal and peer tasks on the controller or host 4 23 Running Applications Running Applications 5 This chapter provides information to configure and run applications on your TRAKKER 2425 hand held terminal Learning About the Terminal Applications Your TRAKKER 2425 terminal is configured and loaded with one of these applications e IBM 3270 terminal emulation Telnet terminal type 3278 2 e IBM 5250 terminal emulation Telnet terminal type 3179 2 e VT100 220 320 and ANSI terminal emulation e 3270 or 5250 screen mapping Terminal emulation TE and screen mapping run on the Intermec UDP Plus protocol that provides reliable data transfer between a host computer and the T2425 hand held terminals TE allows the terminal to communicate through the Model 200 Controller to the host application as if it were directly connected to the host The controller sends data to the terminal in a screen format that emulates the host session You can use the viewporting capabilities on the terminal to view the host screen Screen mapping sends screen transactions from a terminal through the controller to a host application On the controller you create the terminal screens group them into menus and generate each menu into
225. nd from the System Menu For help see Saving Configuration Changes in Flash Memory later in this chapter Note When you boot or reset the terminal it uses the configuration you last saved in flash memory Etore changes in flash memory fused when rebooting the terminal EEE No CANCEL 242XU 054 2 Choose Yes and press to save your changes in flash memory Choose No and press to exit without saving The Exiting TRAKKER 2400 Menu System screen appears Note If you changed the configuration you are prompted to save your changes in RAM as you exited the Configuration Menu If you want the configuration changes to be stored in flash memory you need to choose Yes in this screen 3 15 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Exiting TRAKKER 2400 Menu System Screen Exiting TRAKKER 2466 Menu Sustem OK CANCEL 242XU 055 3 Choose OK and press to exit the TRAKKER 2400 Menu System Choose Cancel and press to return to the Main Menu After you exit the menu system the terminal will resume the application you were running when you started the menu system 3 16 Configuring the Terminal Configuring the Terminal by Scanning Bar Codes You can configure the terminal by scanning bar code labels listed in this manual or by creating your own Code 39 or Code 93 bar code labels For help see Chapter 8 C
226. nd keys first then press Remove the main battery pack and disconnect the backup battery Let the terminal sit for 1 minute Install the battery pack and connect the backup battery Press to turn on the terminal If you keep returning to the Boot Menu try loading the firmware For help see Upgrading the Firmware in Chapter 3 If the terminal will not boot or reset contact your local Intermec service representative for help TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Problems While Operating the Terminal continued Problem Solution The terminal is booting and you see a The screen displays the system that failed POST Report the message that POST failed error message to your supervisor Press s to exit the error message The Boot Menu appears Press B to boot the terminal Your application appears on the display If the terminal still will not boot contact your local Intermec service representative for help The terminal displays the Boot Menu You will see the Boot Menu in these two situations e You remove both batteries at the same time Once you replace the batteries and turn on the terminal the Boot Menu appears Press 8 to boot the terminal and continue working e You just finished upgrading the firmware on the terminal and POST failed Press to boot the terminal Report the problem to your supervisor For help on the Boot Menu se
227. nd press to return to the TE Configuration menu You can continue making changes to the TE configuration Running Applications 5 Unsupported TE Functions These functions are not supported for the current terminal emulation firmware version Terminal Type Unsupported Functions 3270 and 5250 3270 SFE Start Field Extended Order and Write Structured Field commands 5250 PRINT X F6 AID 5250 transparent data 5250 Write Control Character WCC supports error line adjustment field only 5250 write error code to window and write single structured field 5250 extended attributes 5250 I O Feature Input Field accepts any character from all sources of input AutoTab Autorepeat and Macro functions Telnet 3270 Regime option RfC1041 VT100 220 320 VT100 does not support these edit keys home insert and ANSI delete page up and page down VT52 mode Column mode Reverse Screen mode and Interlace mode Double height and double width characters Programmable LEDs Screen alignment test and self tests Report terminal parameters command The terminal does not send a response Identify terminal function Select character protection attribute National replacement and downloadable character sets Autorepeat mode All Types Printing is not supported 5 25 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Using 3270 and 5250 Screen Mapping Make sure you have installed the terminal in your 2 4 G
228. nfiguring 8 60 troubleshooting 6 23 to 6 25 screen See display screen mapping communications errors 6 20 data entry errors 6 21 downloading a template 5 26 entering data in a screen 5 27 initialization errors 6 18 keypad chart for entering characters 2 10 illustrated 2 5 using 2 4 to 2 9 Model 200 Controller preparing 4 7 requesting new template 5 28 starting 1 25 5 4 5 26 troubleshooting 6 18 to 6 22 validating input 5 29 Scroll Viewport commands 3270 and 5250 9 14 VTXXX ANSI 10 10 security ID See RF security ID Select command VTXXX ANSI 10 6 Shift key icon described 2 15 using 2 7 shipping box list of contents 1 5 side boundary configuring the viewport 3270 and 5250 5 11 VTXXX ANSI 5 23 side jump configuring the viewport 3270 and 5250 5 11 VTXXX ANSI 5 23 Index I Sign On screen illustrated 1 26 5 4 site survey planning 4 6 Software Diagnostics menu diagnostic tests defined 6 40 using 6 38 special keys finding 2 4 specifications physical and environmental A 3 to A 6 standard alphanumeric keypad 2 4 standard range scan module installing 2 38 optical parameters A 6 specifications A 6 terminal accessory described 1 4 troubleshooting 6 23 to 6 25 6 53 using 2 37 2 40 window cleaning 6 34 See also scan module or scanning start stop codes conventions defined xx creating bar code labels 8 3 starting applications 1 25 5 4 5 26 configuring the terminal 1
229. ning the Network Connection 4 6 Configuring the Model 200 Controller 4 7 Configuring the 0100 Access Point 4 7 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual vi Configuring the Terminal 4 8 Defining the Network Parameters 4 8 Using RF Communications on the Terminal 4 11 Using the Icons to Monitor Communications 4 12 Using the Terminal Between Access Points 4 14 Configuring the Terminal Over the Network 4 15 Configuring the Terminal From the Controller 4 15 Configuring the Terminal From the Host Computer 4 17 About Network Connectivity and Protocols 4 21 Running Applications Learning About the Terminal Applications 5 3 Starting Your Application 5 4 Using 3270 and 5250 Terminal Emulation 5 5 Using the 3270 or 5250 Keypad 5 6 Configuring 3270 or 5250 TE Parameters 5 8 Configuring Terminal Emulation Screens and Options 5 8 Exiting the TE Configuration Menu 5 12 Understanding Status Line Messages 5 13 Auto Advancing Through Fields on 5250 TE Screens 5 14 Using VT100 220 320 or ANSI Terminal Emulation 5 16 Using the VTXXX ANSI Keypad 5 17 Configuring VTXXX ANSI TE Parameters 5 19 Configuring Terminal Emulation Screens and Options 5 19 Exiting the TE Configuration Menu 5 24 Unsupported TE Functions 5 25 Contents Using 3270 and 5250 Screen Mapping 5 26 Starting the Screen Mapping Application 5 26 Running Screen Mapping on Your Terminal 5 27 Requesting a New Template 5 28 Loading a Validation File 5 29 U
230. nit to reboot causing loss of all FAM Pass G 8 837 resident data PROCEED Press a key to Reboot Unit PRESS 7 to Proceed CEsel Exit 242XU 143 Before you run this test save your data and end your current TE session Press Y to start the test All data in RAM will be lost The terminal starts the RAM test and clears the display You hear a beep after a successful test of each 64K block of data After 15 beeps a test pass is complete and the results appear The sample screen shows a successful test pass To run another test pass do not press a key and the next test begins after a 5 second pause You may let the test continue and test the RAM several times to get a test over time To exit the test press once a test pass is complete The terminal reboots and restarts your default application If an error is found the Destructive RAM Test stops and displays the error address the data written to RAM and the data read from RAM Note this information and contact your local Intermec service representative Caution If the Destructive RAM Test fails stop using the terminal Contact your local Intermec service representative Conseil Si le test Destructive RAM choue veuillez ne plus utiliser le terminal Contactez le repr sentant du service client le Intermec de votre r gion 6 47 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Display Test Purpose Where Avai
231. nt perdues To remove the backup battery 1 Save your data or last transaction and exit your application 2 Press 9 to turn off the terminal 3 Open the battery door by pushing down on the battery door latch and sliding it toward the bottom end of the terminal Lift up the top edge of the battery door to remove it 2 27 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Note If you have a handstrap installed stretch the handstrap s elastic band to allow the T bar to slide out of the T bar opening on the bottom end of the terminal Move the handstrap out of the way to open the battery door Battery door BOTTOM Xt 242XU 079 4 Remove the main battery pack For help see Removing and Installing the Main Battery Pack earlier in this chapter 5 Hold each of the backup battery connectors and gently pull to disconnect the backup battery Battery wire connectors 7 Backup SS battery 242XU 086 2 28 Learning How to Use the Terminal 2 6 Holding the visible end of the backup battery slide the battery up and out of the battery compartment Continue with the next instructions to install the new backup battery Backup battery en Main battery pack compartment 242XU 083 2 29 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual To install a backup battery 1 Slide the backup battery into the lower half of the battery compartment The wired end of the backup ba
232. ntact e by arc over of near proximity e induced by an electrostatic field Glossary G Ethernet A type of LAN that allows the transmission of computer data audio data and video data at 10 Mbps across a linear bus topology Ethernet uses the access method known as Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection CSMA CD See the IEEE 802 3 standard for the specifications firmware Software routines stored in read only memory ROM Unlike random access memory RAM ROM stays intact even without electrical power The TRAKKER 2400 Menu System terminal emulation or screen mapping application TE Configuration Menu and operating environment firmware and drivers are stored in firmware Contrast with software fixed length Characteristic of a bar code symbology in which the number of characters per symbol is predetermined Opposite of variable length flash memory A type of nonvolatile memory Flash memory must be erased in blocks and is commonly used as a supplement to or replacement for hard disks in portable computers and data collection devices frequency hopping A spread spectrum technique by which the band is divided into a number of channels and the transmissions hop from channel to channel in a predetermined sequence full ASCII An operating mode that sets the terminal to properly decode Code 39 or Code 93 labels containing data that includes any of the 128 ASCII characters Function Left key The
233. ntroller and the 0100 Access Point For help see the Model 200 Controller System Manual Part No 063439 and the 0100 Access Point User s Manual Part No 062367 Getting Started 1 To configure the terminal you must know the value of these parameters e Controller IP address e Terminal IP address for each T2425 terminal in the network e RF domain access point e RF security identification ID optional access point Once you have configured the controller and access point you can configure the terminal for the 2 4 GHz network Turning On the Terminal for the First Time Once the batteries are charged and a scan module is installed you are ready to turn on the terminal and configure it Important You must have a scan module attached to use the terminal A scan module is usually installed at the Intermec factory For help see Using the Scan Module in Chapter 2 To turn on the terminal 1 Press the 2 key on the top left of the keypad The TRAKKER Antares screen appears TRAKKER antares WL Initializing Ai VERSION X XX COPYRIGHT 1996 INTERMEC CORPORATION TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 1 16 Note If the TRAKKER Antares screen does not appear you may have a problem with the batteries Make sure the main battery pack is fully charged and installed correctly Make sure a scan module is installed correctly For help see Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Once
234. ocked up Antenna is damaged Diagnostics and troubleshooting See This Section to Find a Solution Terminal Will Not Turn On Problems While Operating the Terminal Problems While Configuring the Terminal Terminal Will Not Communicate With Network Devices Problems Using Terminal Emulation Applications Problems Using the Screen Mapping Application Bar Code Labels Will Not Scan Guidelines for Managing Batteries Booting and Resetting the Terminal Maintaining and Cleaning the Terminal Running Diagnostics Page 6 5 6 6 6 10 6 13 6 15 6 18 6 23 6 26 6 28 6 31 6 35 6 3 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Finding and Solving Problems 6 4 CAUTION If you have a problem while configuring or using the terminal use the tables in this section to find a solution For easy reference problems are grouped into these topics e Terminal Will Not Turn On e Problems While Operating the Terminal e Problems While Configuring the Terminal e Terminal Will Not Communicate With Network Devices e Problems Using Terminal Emulation Applications e Problems Using the Screen Mapping Application e Bar Code Labels Will Not Scan e Guidelines for Managing Batteries Caution There are no user serviceable parts inside the terminal Opening the unit will void the warranty and may cause damage to the internal components
235. ode by pressing t _0 again Normally you type text in Overwrite mode Characters are typed over the existing characters on the screen Deletes or erases the character displayed above the cursor Running Applications 5 Using the Roll Keys 5250 Only If you are running the 5250 TE application on the terminal you can use the roll keys to request and display additional host screens Roll Up 1_ To Enter Press These Keys Roll up f R Roll down f s 242XU 044 Or Scan This Bar Code ROUP RODN Roll Down Description Causes the host to send down additional screens above what appears on the user screen Causes the host to send down additional screens below what appears on the user screen 5 35 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 5 36 5250 terminals support the Roll command Hex 23 received from a host application Using this command a host application can roll an area of the screen up or down The direction of the roll and number of lines to roll are specified in the command The Roll command should not be confused with the Roll Up and Roll Down keys The Roll keys cause the host to send down additional screens when you are at a Roll screen A Roll screen typically has text in the lower right hand corner of the display indicating ther
236. oderate CSdata Acceptable values for data are 0 Low 1 Moderate 2 High One of these bar codes Low Decode Security CS0 Moderate Decode Security CS1 High Decode Security CS2 8 31 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Default Router Purpose Default Syntax Scan 8 32 Defines the IP address assigned to the default router in your 2 4 GHz network The router provides a software and hardware connection between two or more networks that permits traffic to be routed from one network to another on the basis of the intended destinations of that traffic When the Model 200 Controller is on a different subnetwork than the T2425 terminal you need to set the IP address assigned to the default router The terminal uses the router address to send packets across the network to the controller The default of 0 0 0 0 means there is no default router 0 0 0 0 NXn n n n where each n address segment is a number from 0 to 255 The default router address field consists of four separate numbers each separated by a period Note The network cannot be activated if the first address segment in the IP address is set to 0 127 or a number greater than 223 To set the default value for the default router scan this bar code Default Router NX0 0 0 0 To set the default router address 1 Scan this bar code Enter Accumulate Mode Set Default
237. off continued 2 Scan a numeric value for data from these bar codes ATA MU Q cd ba AMA AUC s9 ic a AUN MU 4 5 MUA AT 6 Ae MU AMMA gte Q 3 Scan this bar code Exit Accumulate Mode I _ Beep Volume Purpose Adjusts the volume of the terminal s audio signals For a list of all the beep sounds and audio signals see Understanding the Terminal s Audio Signals in Chapter 2 Set the beep volume according to operator preference and work environment Default Normal 8 8 Syntax Scan Configuration Command Reference BVdata Acceptable values for data are Off Quiet Normal Loud Very loud Lower volume Raise volume ODOR WNF CO One of these bar codes Off Quiet 4 BV0 BV1 Normal Loud 4 BV2 4BV3 Very Loud 4 BV4 Scan one of these bar codes repeatedly to achieve the desired volume Raise Beep Volume Lower Beep Volume BV9 BV8 8 9 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Codabar Purpose Enables or disables decoding of Codabar symbology Codabar is a self checking discrete symbology The American Blood Commission ABC Codabar requires that you retain and transmit the start stop code digits when processing a Codabar symbol As a result configuration CD10 is an illegal configuration Default Disabled Syntax CDdata Acceptable values for data must be two digits corresp
238. ompartment into your hand Continue with the next instructions to install a charged battery pack 242XU 106 To install the battery pack 1 Hold the battery pack with the flat side facing down toward the inside of the battery compartment The small arrow on the top of the battery pack must point toward the top display end of the terminal 2 Place the battery pack into the upper larger half of the battery compartment 2 22 Learning How to Use the Terminal 2 Installing the Battery Pack Connector end Connector pin 2 places 242XU 082 3 Hook the slots on the bottom of the battery pack into the slots on the bottom of the battery compartment 4 Slide the battery pack toward the top end of the terminal until it fits and locks into the connectors inside the bottom case The battery pack must be all of the way forward to close the battery door 2 23 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Installing the Battery Pack 242XU 102 5 On the inside of the battery door make sure the rubber bumper is installed over the ridge near the wall The rubber bumper keeps the battery pack in place Rubber bumper 2 24 Learning How to Use the Terminal 2 6 Hook the bottom edge of the battery door into the bottom case above the backup battery compartment Push the door down to close it over the battery compartment Push the battery door latch down and slide it toward the top
239. on You also need a lithium ion battery pack and battery charger Both accessory items are shipped separately You should have two lithium ion battery packs so that you can use one battery while the other is recharging 1 5 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 1 6 Charging the Main Battery Pack The terminal s main battery pack is a lithium ion battery You must fully charge the battery pack before you can use the terminal The battery pack is the main power source for the terminal To charge the main battery pack e Place the battery pack in an empty slot in the battery charger The battery pack is fully charged in about 2 hours For help see the documentation that came with your battery charger Tip Keep a spare charged main battery pack on hand to operate the terminal without interruption Connecting the Backup Battery The backup battery is a NiCad battery that backs up all memory and the real time clock while you change the main battery pack The backup battery is shipped inside the terminal but it is not connected To connect the backup battery 1 Open the battery door by pushing down on the battery door latch and sliding it toward the bottom end of the terminal Lift up the top edge of the battery door to remove it Getting Started Opening the Battery Door Battery door 242XU 079 2 Find the two connectors in the backup battery compartment One connector is attached
240. on Changes in Flash Memory Configuring the Terminal 3 Saving Configuration Changes in Flash Memory The TRAKKER 2425 terminal uses two copies of the configuration Runtime or RAM configuration is the current or active set of parameters and options enabled on the terminal The configuration is stored in RAM and will be lost if you boot or reset the terminal Boot or flash configuration is the set of parameters and options last saved in flash memory The configuration is stored in flash memory and will be saved and used if you boot or reset the terminal Here are the three ways you can configure the terminal and how the configuration is updated Runtime or RAM Boot or Flash Configure the Terminal Configuration Updated Configuration Updated Using the TRAKKER Yes see Note Yes see Note 2400 Menu System Scanning bar code Yes No labels From the network Yes No Model 200 Controller or host computer Note You are prompted to save your changes in RAM and flash as you exit the Configuration Menu and the TRAKKER 2400 Menu System Your changes are saved if you choose Yes at each screen If you configure the terminal by scanning bar code labels or from the network you may want to save the changes in flash memory To save configuration changes in flash memory 1 Press f 7 2 or scan this bar code The Main Menu appears Enter Test and Service Mode _ 3 19 TRAKKER Antares 2
241. on is not displayed but the Radio icon does appear e Ifthe Connect icon blinks the terminal is trying to connect to the controller You may be out of range of an access point the access point may have recently been turned off or data collection is not started on the controller e Ifthe Connect icon appears and remains on solid the terminal is or was connected and communicating with the access point and the controller within the last 2 minutes The Connect icon is not instantaneously updated but does tell you the communications status the last time data was sent or received from the terminal For help with network communications see Chapter 4 Operating the Terminal in a Network 242XU 108 242XU 110 242XU 111 Learning How to Use the Terminal 2 Data This icon contains a period It appears on the display when data is buffered in the RF interface The data is either waiting to be transmitted to the Model 200 Controller or received data has not been accepted by the terminal s application When no data is being buffered in the RF interface the Data icon is off Battery This icon appears when one or both of the batteries have a low power charge The Battery icon appears with the terminal turned on or off e The Battery icon turns on and remains on and the terminal beeps every 15 seconds when the main battery pack has about 5 to 45 minutes of power left e The Battery icon
242. onding to Digit Value Description First 0 Disabled 1 ABC 2 Standard 3 Concatenated Second 0 Discard Start Stop 1 Transmit ABCD Start Stop 2 Transmit DC1 DC4 Start Stop Scan One of these bar codes Disabled Discard Start Stop ABC Transmit ABCD Start Stop CDO00 CD11 ABC Transmit DC1 DC4 Start Stop Standard Discard Start Stop CD12 CD20 Standard Transmit ABCD Start Stop Standard Transmit DC1 DC4 Start Stop CD21 CD22 8 10 Configuration Command Reference Concatenated Discard Start Stop Concatenated Transmit ABCD Start Stop CD30 CD31 Concatenated Transmit DC1 DC4 Start Stop CD32 8 11 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Code 11 Purpose Enables or disables decoding of Code 11 symbology Code 11 is a very high density discrete numeric bar code It is most extensively used in labeling telecommunications components and equipment Default Disabled Syntax CGdata Acceptable values for data are 0 Disabled 1 Code 11 enabled with one check digit 2 Code 11 enabled with two check digits Scan One of these bar codes Disable Code 11 CG0 Code 11 Enabled With One Check Digit CG1 Code 11 Enabled With Two Check Digits CG2 8 12 Configuration Command Reference 8 Purpose Enables or disables decoding of Code 16K symbology Code 16K is a two dimensional stacked rows high density bar code It is based on Code
243. onds Main battery pack is low 5 to 45 minutes of power left Replace the battery pack with a spare charged battery pack or charge the battery pack 242XU 126 The Battery icon blinks Backup battery is low Keep a charged main battery pack installed in the terminal Leave the terminal off and let the battery pack charge the backup battery The backup battery charge will be fully charged in approximately 18 hours E 242XU 126 The Battery icon blinks and the terminal beeps every 15 seconds The main battery pack and the backup battery charge are both low Immediately turn off the terminal Replace the main battery pack with a spare charged battery pack Leave the terminal off and let the battery pack charge the backup battery The backup battery charge will be fully charged in approximately 18 hours If the Battery icon continues to blink you need to replace the backup battery Learning How to Use the Terminal 2 Managing Your Battery Power To maximize the life of the terminal s backup battery and main battery pack use these power management features Tip Keep a spare charged main battery pack on hand to operate the terminal without interruption Always keep a charged or partially charged main battery pack in the terminal Situation Ways to Save Battery Power You are not using the terminal for 5 minutes or longer Press 0 to put the terminal in Suspend mode Suspen
244. onfiguration Command Reference Note If you are working in the TRAKKER 2400 Menu System you cannot scan configuration commands Exit the menu system to scan configuration commands For example you can use the Beep Volume configuration command to adjust the volume of the terminal s audio signals You can scan this bar code label to set the beep volume to a quiet audio level Set Beep Volume to Quiet BV1 You can create bar code labels that contain more than one configuration command For example you can create one bar code label to configure the terminal for e One Shot Scanner mode SB0 e Scanner Redundancy set to high SR2 e Beep Volume set to very loud BV4 e Disable Keypad Clicker KCO One Shot Scanner oo Set Scanner Redundancy to High Set Beep Volume to Very Loud Disable Keypad Clic SBOSR2BV4K To configure these same four configuration commands you can scan four separate bar code labels in Chapter 8 Configuration Command Reference 3 17 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 3 18 When you create a bar code label to set several configuration commands follow these rules The bar code label must be printed using Code 39 or Code 93 symbology The bar code label must include the start and stop character Most bar code printing utilities automatically include the start and stop character The bar code label must start with Change Configuration command Each conf
245. onfiguration commands For example you can set a preamble that is up to 25 ASCII characters long You need to follow these general instructions to enter variable data To enter variable data in a configuration command 1 Scan a bar code label with this syntax command where is the syntax for the Enter Accumulate Mode command is the syntax for the Change Configuration command command is the syntax for the command you want to change For example the command syntax for a preamble is ADdata To change or set a preamble scan this bar code Enter Accumulate Mode Change Configuration Set Preamble AD 2 Scan a bar code label from the Full ASCII Bar Code Chart in Appendix B To set the preamble to the character T scan this label T a bii Note To use the bar code labels in Appendix B you must configure the terminal to use Code 39 in Full ASCII mode For help see Code 39 later in this chapter 8 5 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Entering Variable Data in a Configuration Command continued 3 Scan the Exit Accumulate Mode bar code label to update the terminal s configuration Exit Accumulate Mode AIM _ Append Time Purpose Default Syntax Scan 8 6 Appends the time to data records that are transmitted from the terminal You can also use the Time in Seconds command to append the time in hours and minutes only or ho
246. or each ASCII character To use these bar code labels you must configure the TRAKKER 2425 terminal to use Code 39 in Full ASCII mode For help see Code 39 in Chapter 8 Control Characters NUL MITT NT U ETX AMT 608 ACK MMT I sgp HT MT TM g FF AMT I gL SI ANAT SO B 6 SOH A EOT D BEL 6G LF gy CR oM DLE GOP STX B ENQ E BS SH VT CK SO ON DC1 AMA O Full ASCII Charts Control Characters continued DC2 OR NAK SU CAN oX ESC O A S Ii D R DC3 OS SYN OVe E M oY FS B S Ii E U DC4 OT ETB oW SUB O7 GS c DEL 20 7 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual dines and Punctuation Marks exclamation point MUA D apostrophe asterisk O comma J B 8 quotation marks LU M N E ALAM JH 4 LIL K i 0 H colon C amp F NN NNN T dash period semicolon gt o J Full ASCII Charts Symbols and Punctuation Marks continued I V tilde S I SEE I O p I K A
247. ork as the Model 200 Controller or on a different subnetwork This table lists the parameters you configure in each type of network Network Parameters Same IP Subnetwork Different IP Subnetwork Time and date X X Network activate X X Controller IP address X X Terminal IP address X X RF domain X X RF security ID Optional Optional Default router X Subnet mask X The network parameters are defined in the next section Defining the Network Parameters This section defines the network parameters you configure when installing the TRAKKER 2425 terminal in a network For each parameter s syntax and options see Chapter 8 Configuration Command Reference Operating the Terminal in a Network 4 Time and Date When you turn on the terminal for the first time you must set the current time and date You also need to set the time and date any time you lose all power to the terminal For help see Setting the Time and Date in Chapter 1 Network Activate Disables or enables RF communications in the 2 4 GHz network If the Network Activate parameter is disabled the network is disabled no RF communications are provided and the radio is turned off When the Network Activate parameter is enabled the TRAKKER 2425 terminal will attempt to connect to the Model 200 Controller Controller IP Address An IP address is a network level address you assign to each device in a TCP IP network The Controller IP Address identifies the IP a
248. ou can save or discard your changes Task Description To exit a screen and save the changes Choose OK and press Or press a in any field except the Cancel button To exit a screen and discard the changes Choose Cancel and press Or press in any field Exiting the Configuration Menu 1 Press to exit the Configuration Menu If you have made any changes to the current configuration this screen prompts you to save the new configuration in RAM The current configuration also called the runtime configuration is the set of parameters currently enabled on the terminal Save new configuration Cin RAM Wes No CANCEL 242XU 059 2 Choose Yes and press to save your changes in RAM and update the current configuration on the terminal Choose No and press to exit without changing the configuration The Main Menu appears 3 14 Configuring the Terminal 3 3 Choose another menu from the Main Menu or press to exit the TRAKKER 2400 Menu System For help exiting the menu system see the next procedure for Exiting the TRAKKER 2400 Menu System Exiting the TRAKKER 2400 Menu System 1 From the Main Menu press If you have made any changes this screen prompts you to store the changes in flash memory You can also save the runtime configuration in flash memory by choosing the Store Configuration comma
249. p terminal keyboard you use special keys on the T2425 terminal keypad to access all of the keys and functions you need A terminal emulation TE keypad comes with the TE option you ordered for the T2425 terminal Each TE keypad is similar to the standard alphanumeric keypad but contains additional keys that are available on an IBM 3270 keyboard IBM 5250 keyboard or VTXXX or ANSI keyboard Finding the Special Keys Before you use the terminal s keypad make sure you can find all of the different types of keys on the keypad You need to use these special keys on all four keypad options The special keys that you use to type characters or perform functions are explained in the next sections You can use the Backlight key to turn on the backlight change the display contrast and change the beep volume For help see Adjusting the Display From the Keypad later in this chapter Learning How to Use the Terminal 2 Finding the Special Keys Scan button Backlight key Suspend Heating fa cee Are Cursor keys 7 8 9 4 5 6 i 1 2 3 Space Backspace key ee 0 Fob FnR Enter He ey Co Function Left key C EIT ME Enter key Function Right gonm N key K C M N o AMAA pe ke Ctrl Tab A Es A eA 242XU 004 Shift key Control key 2 5 TR
250. pace reader command 7 6 VTXXX ANSI command 10 3 Backtab command 3270 and 5250 9 4 backup battery charge status 2 33 6 45 charging 1 13 2 26 temperature range A 4 cold temperatures using in 6 27 connecting 1 6 2 30 described 2 19 2 26 disposing of safely 2 33 installing 2 30 low battery charge 2 34 6 9 power specifications A 3 power managing 6 26 removing 2 27 temperature and volts checking 6 44 bar code labels 3270 and 5250 commands C 5 to C 9 ASCII chart B 6 to B 13 bar code symbologies enabling 1 30 bar code labels continued conventions defined xx creating about start stop codes 8 3 decode security configuring 8 31 Multiple Read labels 7 12 quiet zone defined 2 41 reader commands troubleshooting 6 6 6 11 regular labels 7 12 rules for creating 3 17 scanning accumulating data 7 4 configuring the terminal 3 3 3 17 learning to 2 40 troubleshooting 6 23 to 6 25 VTXXX ANSI commands C 11 to C 13 bar code symbologies choosing 3 4 Codabar configuring 8 10 Code 1 configuring A 5 Code 11 configuring 8 12 Code 128 configuring 8 23 Code 16K configuring 8 13 Code 2 of 5 configuring 8 14 Code 39 configuring 8 16 Code 49 configuring 8 20 Code 93 configuring 8 22 configuration commands list of 3 25 8 4 A 7 enabling quick reference 1 30 list of A 5 MSI configuring 8 41 PDF 417 configuring A 5 Plessey configuring 8 45 troubleshooting b
251. pad Test Main Board Menu Radio Test RE 232 Loop Back Scanner Test N Felect item CEnter Next screen CF11 Help CEscl Exit 242XU 069 242XU 067 4 Troubleshooting Press A or to choose the diagnostic test you want to run and press The diagnostic screen appears Use the information on the screen or follow the instructions to run the diagnostic test For help see Defining the Diagnostics Screens later in this section Press to exit each diagnostic screen and to exit the diagnostics menus Choose another menu from the Main Menu or press to exit the TRAKKER 2400 Menu System If you have made any changes a screen prompts you to store the changes in flash memory For help see Exiting the TRAKKER 2400 Menu System in Chapter 3 After you exit the menu system the T2425 terminal will resume the application you were running when you started the menu system Defining the Diagnostics Screens You can find the following information about each diagnostic test in this section Description and purpose Menu where the diagnostic is available Sample diagnostic screen Definition and explanation of the diagnostic screen The diagnostics are grouped into three categories Software diagnostics Hardware diagnostics System diagnostics Within each category the diagnostics are listed alphabetically by name 6 39 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal Us
252. pe a Keypad Rev a Keypad Table a CEnter Next screen CEnter Next screen CEsec Exit CEsec Exit 242XU 142 Definition Press to display the next screen of hardware information If you are having a specific problem with one system such as the radio note the hardware version on the terminal before contacting your local Intermec service representative The country code information on the Hardware Configuration screen is only valid when the radio Network Activate command is enabled If the radio is disabled the country code information is not valid For help see Network Activate in Chapter 8 6 49 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Keypad Test Purpose Where Available Sample Screen Definition 6 50 An application programmer can use the Keypad Test screen to quickly find out the hexadecimal and decimal key code values for any key on the keypad You can also use the test to make sure the keypad is operating correctly Hardware Diagnostics menu KEYPAD TEST Key Hex Decimal 1a 61 o7 7h 62 38 To 63 39 7a 64 166 7 ie 65 161 7 66 162 g 67 163 hy 6g 164 a5 69 165 7 b 6A 166 k 6E 107 717 6c 168 Tm 6D 169 CEsel Exit 242XU 133 Press any key on the keypad to display the hexadecimal and decimal value of the key When you press the terminal pauses for a few seconds to display the hexadecimal and decimal values before you exit the screen R
253. perate and store the terminal within the temperature ranges listed in this table Note For information about using the terminal in cold temperature environments see Guidelines for Managing Batteries in Chapter 6 Fahrenheit Celsius Type of Operation Temperature Range Temperature Range Charging the battery pack 32 F to 104 F 0 C to 40 C Operating the terminal 4 F to 122 F 20 C to 50 C Storing the terminal 4 F to 140 F 20 C to 60 C with or without batteries installed Relative Humidity Specifications 0 to 95 noncondensing humidity Display e CGA compatible e 16 lines x 20 columns backlit LCD e 25 lines by 80 columns virtual display with viewport feature Keypad Options e Full alphanumeric keypad with 55 keys available in English e Terminal emulation keypads for IBM 3270 IBM 5250 and VTXXX ANSI Application Options e IBM 3270 terminal emulation e IBM 5250 terminal emulation e Screen mapping to IBM 3270 or 5250 terminals e VT100 220 320 and ANSI terminal emulation Terminal Specifications 4 Memory e 2MB programmable flash memory e 1MB battery backed RAM Radio Frequency Communications e 2 4 GHz to 2 4835 GHz radio e Frequency hopping spread spectrum radio e 100 mW output power maximum e 1 6 Mbits per second data speed e Coverage 240 feet 80 meters Network Support e Host connectivity through 0100 Access Point and Model 200 Controller e Ethernet network using UDP
254. pose Default Syntax Scan 8 22 Enables or disables decoding of Code 93 symbology Code 93 is a variable length continuous symbology that uses four element widths Disabled CFdata Acceptable values for data are 0 Disabled 1 Enabled One of these bar codes Disable Code 93 CFO Enable Code 93 CF1 Code 128 Purpose Default Syntax Scan Configuration Command Reference 8 Enables or disables decoding of Code 128 symbology Code 128 is a very high density alphanumeric symbology that supports the extended ASCII character set It is a variable length continuous code that uses multiple element widths Standard CHdata Acceptable values for data are 0 Disabled 1 Standard Code 128 2 UCC EAN Code 128 One of these bar codes Disable Code 128 CHO0 Enable Standard Code 128 CH1 Enable UCC EAN Code 128 CH2 8 23 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Code 128 continued Notes 8 24 If you configure Standard Code 128 the terminal will not decode Function Code 1 characters in the first position of a bar code label Any subsequent Function Code 1 characters are translated to the ASCII GS character as a separator for variable length fields If you configure UCC EAN Code 128 the terminal will decode a bar code label as Standard Code 128 unless one of the first two characters are a start character and a Function Code 1 In th
255. pted to return to the TE Configuration menu 5 19 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 2 Choose Configure TE and press The TE Configuration menu appears TE CONFIGURATION Communications Viewport Exit Config Help N Select item CEnter Next 242XU 019 3 Press A or F to highlight the function you want to configure and press To exit see Exiting the TE Configuration Menu later in this chapter The Terminal screen contains these options TERMINAL Page 1 Text Size Terminal Type UTS20 OK CANCEL 242XU 026 Text Size Select the size of text the T2425 displays on the terminal screen Options are regular height normal characters or double height Terminal Type Select the terminal type of the host system The supported terminal types are VT100 VT220 VT320 RDRANSI and ANSI 5 20 Running Applications 5 Note If you select ANSI RDRANSI or VT100 as the terminal type you will only see part of the options available on page two of the Terminal screens VT220 and VT320 Screen ANSI and VT100 Screen Terminal Mode UT320 7 Bit User Defined Key Unlock Keypad Mode Keypad Mode Hume ric Hume ric Cursor Mode Cursor Mode Cursor Cursor OKE CANCEL OK CANCEL 242XU 027 Terminal Mode VT220 320 only Select the Terminal mode that corresponds to your terminal type
256. ransmit data via RF communications Each terminal is shipped with only one of these applications e 3270 terminal emulation e 5250 terminal emulation e VT100 220 320 or ANSI terminal emulation e 3270 or 5250 screen mapping To use the terminal e Press 9 to turn on the terminal One of these login or application screens appear For screen mapping you may also see the template menu if a template has been downloaded from the controller 3270 5250 Sign On Screen VTXXX ANSI Login Screen Screen Mapping Screen User Password x Program procedure Menu Current Library lt login File Name 242XU 014 If the terminal is correctly configured and communicating with your host computer the terminal will connect and begin running the default application You can begin using the terminal to collect data For help see Chapter 5 Running Applications 4 11 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual You See These Icons Using the Icons to Monitor Communications As you use the TRAKKER 2425 terminal to collect data icons are displayed to help you monitor RF and network communications on the terminal Use the two icons shown in the illustration to monitor communications between the terminal and other devices in the 2 4 GHz network USOM es wie ee ee Password 0 2a ae Program procedure Henu
257. rast changes to the lightest contrast level To change the beep volume of the audio signals e To change the volume of the terminal s audio signals press t 7 Each time you press f Q7 it makes the beep volume one level louder There are five beep volume levels including off If the volume is at the loudest level and you press f G7 the beep volume is turned off If you press f Q7 again the volume changes to the quietest level 2 14 Learning How to Use the Terminal 2 Understanding the Icons You can use the terminal s icons to monitor the status of special keys battery power saving data to flash memory RF and network communications and viewport movement As you use the terminal the icons are turned on and off in the top line of the terminal display to indicate the current status Ctrl This icon appears when you press A The key is stored in the keypad buffer until you press another key When you press a second key the key combination is 242xU 114 entered into the terminal and the icon disappears Shift This icon appears when you press The key is stored in the keypad buffer until you press another key be eee eee When you press a second key the key combination is 242xU 118 entered into the terminal and the icon disappears ee a characters as uppercase letters When you press f Z to Caps Lock This icon appears when you press f Z to enable the Caps Lock f
258. re the controller Make sure the terminal is configured correctly and enabled Make sure the controller is turned on and data collection is started The Connect icon Normal communications The T2425 terminal can communicate with the 0100 You can send and receive data between the terminal and the Model 200 Controller TEmarnsion Access Point and the Model 200 Controller Normal communications You can send and receive data between ze the terminal and the Model 200 The Connect icon remains on and the Data icon blinks The T2425 terminal is sending data to or receiving data from the Model 200 Controller Controller Note You may not see the Data icon blink if communications are occurring instantaneously The Connect icon and Data icon remain on Normal communications The T2425 terminal has received data for an application from the Model 200 Controller The data is stored in the terminal s radio buffer until the application is ready to process the data You can send and receive data between the terminal and the Model 200 Controller 4 13 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Using the Terminal Between Access Points The 0100 Access Point acts as a wireless bridge to provide communications between the TRAKKER 2425 terminal and the Ethernet network You may have multiple access points in your 2 4 GHz network to provide uninte
259. re transmitted to their destination It is used when the upline network or host application is temporarily stopped G 21 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual G 22 subnet mask An internal TCP IP protocol stack variable This mask is used in the IP protocol to separate the subnet address from the local IP address The IP protocol performs a bit wise AND on the IP address and the subnet mask Each address segment represents one byte where 255 converts to FF hex This computation is used to find out if the Model 200 Controller and TRAKKER 2425 terminal are on different subnetworks For example if the terminal IP address is 192 9 150 184 and the subnet mask is 255 255 255 0 the terminal is on the subnetwork 192 9 150 0 subnetwork See domain Suspend mode The mode the TRAKKER 2425 terminal enters when you press 9 to turn off the terminal In Suspend mode the terminal saves all memory and turns off the power to most of the hardware Contrast with resume symbology See bar code symbology TCP Transmission control protocol This is the protocol for the transport layer in the TCP IP protocol It provides a method for reliable error free full duplex communications between sender and receiver nodes TCP takes long messages from higher layers and breaks them up before passing them to IP for transmission TCP makes sure that the messages are in sequence when it receives them and it retries failed transmiss
260. rminal IP Address Purpose Default Syntax Scan 8 64 Defines the IP address assigned to the TRAKKER 2425 terminal in your 2 4 GHz network An IP address is a network level address you assign to each device in a TCP IP network The IP address you set on the T2425 terminal must match the address that is set on the controller 0 0 0 0 NDn n n n where each n address segment is a number from 0 to 255 The terminal IP address field consists of four separate numbers each separated by a period Note The network cannot be activated if the first address segment in the IP address is set to 0 127 or a number greater than 223 To set the default terminal IP address scan this bar code Default Terminal IP Address ND0 0 0 0 To set the terminal IP address 1 Scan this bar code Enter Accumulate Mode Set Terminal IP Address ND Configuration Command Reference 2 Scan a numeric value from 0 to 255 to set an n field of the terminal IP address from these bar codes Q Pad g 4 I5 6 ETE Q 4Q 3 Scan this bar code Period 4 Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to set the next two numbers in the terminal IP address field After you scan the last address segment go to Step 5 Do not scan the period after the last address segment 5 Scan this bar code Exit Accumulate Mode _ 8 65 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held T
261. rminal is corrupted Try requesting or downloading the template again For help see Requesting a New Template in Chapter 5 Error on read The template file was downloaded from the controller but there was a problem reading the file The template file on the terminal is corrupted Try requesting or downloading the template again For help see Requesting a New Template in Chapter 5 Screen Mapping Communications Errors Problem Solution Transaction Buffer Full The buffer holding transactions to be sent to the controller is full Stop collecting data with this terminal Make sure the terminal is communicating with the Model 200 Controller and let the terminal send all the transactions in the buffer before you continue collecting data Sending Buffer Transactions This is an information message to tell you that buffered transactions are now being sent to the controller You can begin collecting data again once the message clears Transaction Aborted The transaction just sent to the controller was not received Try sending the transaction again 6 20 Troubleshooting Screen Mapping Communications Errors continued Problem Transmit Error XX press Enter Receive Error XX press Enter Shutting down Controller Shutdown Solution There is an error transmitting data to the controller XX represents the status code error Note the error code listed in the message and contact your local Intermec
262. rovided because you program the keys differently for each application The function of each editing key is determined by the software application you are using Refer to your application user s manual for information about the editing key functions Note To scan the bar code labels in this chapter you must configure the terminal to use Code 39 in Full ASCII mode For help see Code 39 in Chapter 8 Backspace Keypad Scan Backspace UC CU UTA BKSP Note The Backspace editing key is available for VT100 and ANSI terminals End Keypad ta Scan End END 10 3 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 10 4 Find Keypad f x Scan Find UICC TLL FIND Home Keypad LAL z Scan Home AU CSUN AAS HOME Insert Keypad f 4 orf o Scan Insert INS Next Screen Keypad f R Next NEXT VT100 220 320 and ANSI TE Command Reference Paging Keys Viewport Paging keys move the T2425 display to the next adjacent area on the screen These keys move the display as a viewport within the host terminal screen the screen itself does not advance or scroll The paging keys let you view the rest of the screen without entering data When you page you move only the viewport not the cursor and the cursor disappears from the display Note The Paging keys are availabl
263. rrupted wireless communication at any location within your facility To use the terminal between access points and continue sending and receiving data you must follow these guidelines e The radio coverage of each access point must overlap to ensure that the roaming T2425 terminal will always have a connection available e You configure each access point with the same RF domain number and security ID e You configure the T2425 terminals with the same RF domain and security ID as the access points to which they may communicate e All access points that the T2425 terminals may communicate with and roam between must be installed in the same IP subnetwork The T2425 terminal cannot roam between IP subnetworks Once the network is configured you can collect data anywhere within range of the access points in the wireless network When you move out of range of one access point the terminal automatically polls the other access points in the same RF domain to continue the network connection If you are out of range of all access points in the network the data is stored in the terminal s radio buffer The Data icon appears on the display and the Connect icon starts flashing or turns off You can continue to collect data until the radio buffer is full When the buffer is full the application displays a communication timeout status When you move back into range and network communications are re established the data in the radio buffer is trans
264. rt Exit Config Help N Select item CEnter Next CFil Help LEsc Exit 242XU 019 3 Press amp or F to highlight the function you want to configure and press To exit see Exiting the TE Configuration Menu later in this chapter The Terminal screen contains this option TERMINAL Text Size Regular Height OK CANCEL 242XU 020 Text Size Selects the size of text the T2425 terminal displays on the terminal screen Options are regular height normal characters and double height double high text TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual The Communications screen contains this option COMMUNI CATIONS Host Name IMEYED OK CANCEL 242XU 021 Host Name Enter the name of the host to which you want the terminal to connect You can enter a host name that is up to 13 characters long Note If you have linked a terminal with a host name on the Model 200 Controller you do not need to enter a host name in this screen If you have not linked a terminal with a host name on the controller you must enter a host name for this parameter The host name in this screen must match a host name in the list of available hosts defined on the controller The Viewport screen contains these options Yiewport Mode Side Boundary 1 Eide Jump 18 Vertical Boundary 1 Vertical Jump 8 OK CANCEL
265. rt within the host TE screen the screen itself does not advance or scroll The paging keys let you view the rest of the TE screen without entering data When you page you move only the viewport not the cursor and the cursor may disappear from the display For help on the paging keys see Chapter 9 3270 and 5250 TE Command Reference or Chapter 10 VT100 220 320 and ANSI TE Command Reference 3270 Example Home amp PAL x PgUp A l 7 8 9 Pglit PA2 PgRt a a zs ra 4 5 6 oY SSS End PA3 PgDn 1 2 3 d T ar b d Del gt 242XU 043 5 33 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual To Enter Home End Page up Page down Page right Page left Insert Delete 5 34 Press These Keys l t 7 Or Scan This Bar Code END PGUP PGRI PGLT HOME PGDN INS DEL Description Moves the viewport to the top left corner of the TE screen Moves the viewport to the end of the last line displayed on the TE screen Moves the viewport up one page Moves the viewport down one page Moves the viewport right one page Moves the viewport left one page Each character you type is inserted after the cursor until you exit Insert m
266. run on the terminal Diagnostic Test Access Point Application Events Battery Monitor Battery Status Beeper Test Clear Task Profiles Destructive RAM Test Display Test Error Logger Hardware Configuration Keypad Test Description Lists information about the 0100 Access Point the terminal is communicating with across the network Shows the current status of each application event to help debug applications Shows the voltage temperature and charging status for the main battery pack Shows the power remaining in the main battery pack and the power status for the backup battery Sounds a series of beeps to test the beeper by using a range of beep volumes and beep frequencies Clears the Task Status counters so that you can begin accumulating new task statistics for the Task Status screen Extensively tests the RAM Tests and turns on the pixels on the display to make sure all areas of the display are working correctly Lists any errors that the firmware did not expect Lists the type of the main hardware components used on the terminal Also shows the RF country code configured on the terminal Shows the hexadecimal and decimal key code value for any key on the terminal keypad 6 35 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 6 36 Diagnostic Tests continued Diagnostic Test Radio Test RS 232 Loop Back Scanner Test Subsystem Versions Suspend Resume Test
267. rvice representative choose OK to continue and upgrade the firmware The terminal reboots and then displays the Loader Waiting screen For help see the Readme txt file on the TRAKKER Antares Firmware disk Note If you reach the Loader Waiting screen and cannot upgrade or continue press amp or V9 to exit without upgrading the firmware The Boot Menu appears Press B to boot the terminal and continue 6 Choose another menu from the Main Menu or press to exit the TRAKKER 2400 Menu System 3 24 Configuring the Terminal 3 Recording Your Terminal s Configuration These tables list all of the configuration parameters their options and where to find them in the Configuration Menu of the TRAKKER 2400 Menu System The default setting for each parameter is identified in bold italics in these tables You should have an accurate record of the terminal s configuration settings in case the terminal s volatile memory and the configuration setup is lost You can record the configuration on the following pages by circling the option you chose for each parameter or writing the value Bar Code Symbologies Table Parameter Syntax Codabar CD Start Stop digit Code 11 CG Code 16K CP Code 2 of 5 CC Code 39 CB Check digit Options Disabled ABC Standard Concatenated Discard Retain ABCD Retain DC1 DC4 Disabled One check digit Two check digits Disa
268. s list of 3 28 A 8 icons using to monitor 4 12 network protocols defined 4 21 to 4 23 network specifications A 5 RF specifications A 5 RF using 4 11 troubleshooting 6 13 See also network Communications screen configuring 3270 and 5250 5 10 VTXXX ANSI 5 22 computer See host computer configuration commands Append Time 8 6 Automatic Shutoff 8 7 Beep Volume 8 8 category listed by 8 4 Codabar 8 10 Code 11 8 12 Code 128 8 23 Code 16K 8 13 Code 2 of 5 8 14 Code 39 8 16 Code 49 8 20 Code 93 8 22 Command Processing 8 25 to 8 28 configuring from controller 4 15 from host 4 17 to 4 20 overview of 3 3 Controller IP Address 8 29 Decode Security 8 31 Default Router 8 32 default settings list of A 7 to A 9 Display Backlight Timeout 8 34 Display Contrast 8 36 Interleaved 2 of 5 8 37 Keypad Caps Lock 8 39 Keypad Clicker 8 40 MSI 8 41 Network Activate 8 43 Network Loopback 8 44 configuration commands continued Plessey 8 45 Postamble 8 46 Preamble 8 48 recording the configuration 3 25 to 3 30 Resume Execution 8 50 RF Domain 8 51 RF Security ID 8 52 RF Wakeup On Broadcast 8 54 Scan Ahead 8 55 Scanner Mode 8 56 Scanner Redundancy 8 57 Scanner Selection 8 59 Scanner Timeout 8 60 Scanner Trigger 8 61 scanning labels to configure the terminal 3 17 Subnet Mask 8 62 syntax listed by A 10 Terminal IP Address 8 64 Time and Date 8 66 Time in Seconds 8 67 troubleshooting 6
269. s on a different IP subnetwork from the Model 200 Controller you must also configure the default router and subnet mask Choose the Advanced Networks command to set these parameters For help see Chapter 4 Operating the Terminal in a Network Press to exit the Communications Menu The Configuration Menu appears Press to exit the Configuration Menu Press to choose Yes and save the new configuration in RAM Once the changes are saved the terminal uses the new configuration Save new configuration Cin RAM Wes No CANCEL 242XU 059 Press to exit the TRAKKER 2400 Menu System 1 23 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 16 Press to choose Yes and store your changes permanently in flash memory Etore changes in flash memory fused when rebooting the terminal ves o 242XU 054 17 Press to choose OK and exit the TRAKKER 2400 Menu System Continue with the next procedure to start your application Exiting TRAKKER 2466 Menu Sustem OK CANCEL 242XU 055 1 24 Getting Started fi Starting the Application Your terminal has been configured and loaded with only one of these applications e 3270 and 5250 screen mapping e IBM 3270 terminal emulation e IBM 5250 terminal emulation e VT100 220 320 and ANSI ter
270. s or disables scan ahead If you enable this parameter you can scan a number of labels that are held in a stack until the terminal can process the data If you disable this parameter the terminal processes each label you scan before you can scan the next label Disabled SDdata Acceptable values for data are 0 Disabled scan one label at a time 1 Enabled scan many labels at a time One of these bar codes Disable Scan Ahead SD0 Enable Scan Ahead SD1 8 55 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Scanner Mode Purpose Default Syntax Scan 8 56 Defines how the scanner operates when you press the Scan button or activate a cabled laser scanner There are two types of modes e In One Shot mode you must press the Scan button or activate the cabled laser scanner each time you want to scan a bar code Once you scan a bar code the scanner turns off e In Automatic Auto trigger mode you press the Scan button once or activate the cabled laser scanner once to scan a series of bar codes When you release the button or trigger the scanner turns off To scan the same bar code more than once you must release the Scan button or trigger or scan a different bar code before attempting a second scan One Shot mode SBdata Acceptable values for data are 0 One Shot mode 1 Automatic mode One of these bar codes Enable One Shot Mode SBO0 Enable Automatic Mode
271. s to be faint or solution of ammonia and water Wipe dry Do not allow obscured abrasive material to touch the window When you press the Scan button the Move within 2 feet of a wall and press the Scan button scanner LEDs at the top of the keypad again Make sure the scan module emits the red laser beam do not light up If the LEDs do not light there may be a problem with them For help contact your local Intermec service representative If the laser beam does not turn on check the other problems in this section for a possible solution When you release the Scan button the The scanner LEDs will remain on if you configure the scanner LEDs at the top of the keypad terminal to use edge triggering If you configure the terminal do not turn off for level triggering and the scanner LEDs remain on there may be a problem with the LEDs Press the Scan button again without scanning a bar code label If the LEDs are still on contact your local Intermec service representative 6 25 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 6 26 Guidelines for Managing Batteries Follow these guidelines to manage the terminal batteries prevent problems and preserve battery power Main Battery Pack e ALWAYS turn off the terminal BEFORE you remove the main battery pack e ALWAYS keep a charged or partially charged main battery pack in the terminal e Keep a spare charged battery pack on hand e Ifthe Battery icon appears and rema
272. scription No activity ready for operator input The terminal operator pressed an AID key to transmit data to the host The host did not accept the data and transmitted a Write Error command to the TE application indicating the field where the error occurred Use the viewport to view the error message and corrective procedure Press ErrRst to clear this message 5 13 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 5 14 Status Line Messages continued Status Line Message Description INIT Terminal is attempting to connect to the server INS Terminal is in Insert mode LOCK Keypad is locked by the host application MSGWAIT A system message is waiting to be read 5250 only PEND The terminal is connected to the server and is waiting for an active host session TNAPP Terminal is in session with a host application TNSVR Terminal is connected to the server F C or D Current Viewport mode of the T2425 terminal One of these characters is displayed to indicate the Viewport mode status F Viewport Follow mode is enabled C Viewport Center mode is enabled D Viewport movement is disabled XSYS Keypad is disabled and the TE application is waiting for a host response Auto Advancing Through Fields on 5250 TE Screens You can set up your TRAKKER 2425 terminal so that when a user scans data into a field on a 5250 TE screen a Field Exit command clears the rest of the field advances to the next field and tri
273. se From Network Keypad Scan Resets all firmware on the terminal resets the terminal emulation or screen mapping application and starts the application You can use the Reset command to restart your application if you are having problems Note You can also try resetting the hardware if your application or terminal is locked up and the terminal will not respond to any other commands For help see Booting and Resetting the Terminal in Chapter 6 Not supported Reset Firmware 7 13 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Scanner Trigger On and Off Purpose From Network Keypad Scan 7 14 The Scanner Trigger On and Off commands are the same as pushing and releasing the Scan button on the keypad The Scan button and Scanner Trigger commands control the integrated scanner on a standard range scan module Note The Scanner Trigger On and Off commands do not activate the scanner device connected to the module for cabled scanners After a Scanner Trigger On command the scanner operates differently depending on the Scanner mode and scanner trigger configuration settings e If you configure the terminal to use One Shot Scanner mode and level triggering the scanner automatically turns off after a good read of a bar code label or after the scanner timeout period elapses e Ifyou configure the terminal to use Automatic Scanner mode and level triggering the scanner rem
274. service representative for help Press to continue There is an error receiving data from the controller XX represents the status code error Note the error code listed in the message and contact your local Intermec service representative for help Press to continue The Model 200 Controller is shutting down You may continue collecting data and buffer the transactions in the terminal until the controller starts again or stop collecting data with the terminal The Model 200 Controller has shut down You may continue collecting data and buffer the transactions in the terminal until the controller starts again or stop collecting data with the terminal Screen Mapping Data Entry Errors Problem Minimum length error This field is required Prefix error Bad Data Solution You entered too few characters in the field Enter your data again using the required number of characters You cannot skip a required field Enter data in the field to continue The prefix character entered is incorrect Enter your data again using a valid prefix The data entered did not pass the input test defined for this field Enter your data again 6 21 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Screen Mapping Data Entry Errors continued Problem Validation File Missing Range Error Bad Picture Match Numeric Only Hour Greater Than 23 Minutes Greater Than 59 Seconds Greater Than 59 Days
275. set the terminal try the following in order e Press to turn off the terminal e Scan the Reset Firmware label to restart the firmware and application Reset k If the terminal or application still will not respond reset the terminal To reset the terminal 1 Press the _f keys in sequence The terminal turns off 2 Press V9 to turn on the terminal The Boot Menu appears BOOT MEHU b Boot System 1 Run Loader qa Power Down POWER DOWN IN 6 SEC 242XU 104 Note If the terminal returns to the exact same screen the reset sequence did not work Repeat Step 1 Make sure you press the 2 key just after the tj and 3 Press 8 to boot the terminal Once the terminal has finished booting your TE application or screen mapping application appears If the terminal still will not reset or boot try loading the firmware For help contact your local Intermec service representative 6 30 Troubleshooting Maintaining and Cleaning the Terminal The TRAKKER 2425 terminal is built for use in a rugged industrial working environment You may need to perform these minor maintenance tasks to keep the terminal in good working order e Replace the antenna e Clean the display e Clean the standard range scan module window The antenna is one of the few exposed parts that may be damaged while you use the terminal You can order and replace the antenna using the instruct
276. sing the Viewport 5 30 How the Viewport Works 5 30 Using the Cursor Keys 5 32 Using the Paging Keys 5 33 Using the Roll Keys 5250 Only 5 35 Troubleshooting How to Use This Chapter 6 3 Finding and Solving Problems 6 4 Terminal Will Not Turn On 6 5 Problems While Operating the Terminal 6 6 Problems While Configuring the Terminal 6 10 Terminal Will Not Communicate With Network Devices 6 13 Problems Using Terminal Emulation Applications 6 15 Problems Using the Screen Mapping Application 6 18 Bar Code Labels Will Not Scan 6 23 Guidelines for Managing Batteries 6 26 Booting and Resetting the Terminal 6 28 Booting the Terminal 6 28 Booting the Terminal on Resume 6 28 Using the Boot Menu 6 29 Resetting the Terminal 6 30 Maintaining and Cleaning the Terminal 6 31 Replacing the Antenna 6 32 Cleaning the Scan Module Window and Display 6 34 vii TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Running Diagnostics 6 35 Running Diagnostics From the Menu System 6 36 Defining the Diagnostics Screens 6 39 Defining the Software Diagnostics Screens 6 40 Application Events 6 40 Clear Task Profile 6 41 Error Logger 6 42 Task Status 6 43 Defining the Hardware Diagnostics Screens 6 44 Battery Monitor 6 44 Battery Status 6 45 Beeper Test 6 46 Destructive RAM Test 6 47 Display Test 6 48 Hardware Configuration 6 49 Keypad Test 6 50 Radio Test 6 51 RS 232 Loop Back 6 52 Scanner Test 6 53 Defining the System Diagnostics Screens 6
277. ss the TRAKKER 2400 Menu System the Main Menu appears You use the Configuration Menu and the System Menu to configure the terminal The Configuration Menu contains these commands CONFIGURATION MENU Sumbologies Menu Terminal Menu N Select item CEnter Next screen CFil Help CEse Exit 242XU 010 Symbologies Menu Choose the Symbologies Menu to configure and activate the bar code symbologies the terminal can decode An asterisk on the Symbologies Menu indicates that the symbology is active For help see Choosing the Symbologies the Terminal Decodes earlier in this chapter 3 7 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 3 8 Communications Menu Choose the Communications menu to configure the primary network parameters the advanced network parameters and the RF driver parameters For help see Chapter 4 Operating the Terminal in a Network Terminal Menu Choose the Terminal Menu to configure the way the terminal keypad scanner or display operate For help see Controlling How the Terminal Will Operate earlier in this chapter The System Menu contains these commands Set Time and Date Etore Configuration Upgrade Firmware N Select item CEnter Next screen CFil Help CEse Exit 242XU 051 Load Default Values Lets you load the default configuration values For help see Restoring the Terminal s Default Configuration later in this chapter
278. t Mask 8 62 Terminal IP Address 8 64 Time and Date 8 66 Time in Seconds 8 67 UDP Port 8 68 UPC EAN 8 70 Contents 3270 and 5250 TE Command Reference Command Descriptions 9 3 Attention 9 3 Backtab 9 4 Clear 9 4 Cursor Home 9 5 Delete 9 5 End 9 5 Enter 9 6 Enter TE Configuration Menu 9 6 Erase Input 9 6 Erase to End of Field 9 7 Error Reset 9 7 Fast Cursor Right or Left 9 8 Field and Field 9 9 Field Exit 9 10 Help 9 10 Home 9 11 Insert 9 11 New Line 9 11 Paging Keys Viewport 9 12 Reset 9 13 Roll Up and Roll Down 9 13 Scroll Viewport Keys 9 14 Status 9 15 System Request 9 15 Tab 9 16 Program Function Keys 9 17 Program Attention Keys for 3270 Terminals 9 21 Other Keys 9 22 xi TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual VT100 220 320 and ANSI TE Command 1 0 Reference Editing Key Commands for VT220 320 Terminals 10 3 Backspace 10 3 End 10 3 Find 10 4 Home 10 4 Insert 10 4 Next Screen 10 4 Paging Keys Viewport 10 5 Previous Screen 10 6 Remove 10 6 Select 10 6 Program Function Keys 10 7 Additional Functions 10 10 Appendix A Terminal Specifications Physical and Environmental Specifications A 3 Default Configuration A 7 Configuration Commands by Syntax A 10 Appendix B Full ASCII Charts Full ASCII Table B 3 Full ASCII Bar Code Chart B 6 Control Characters B 6 Symbols and Punctuation Marks B 8 Numbers B 10 Uppercase Letters B 11 Lowercase Letters B 12
279. t data record If no data has been accumulated an empty data record is entered Not supported Not supported Exit Accumulate Mode TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Operating Reader Commands The reader commands you can use to operate or change the terminal s configuration are listed in this section The operating commands are listed in alphabetical order You will find the purpose syntax and bar code labels for these reader commands in this section e Backlight On and Off e Change Configuration e Default Configuration e Multiple Read Labels e Reset Firmware e Scanner Trigger On and Off e Test and Service Mode Reader Command Reference Backlight On and Off Purpose From Network Keypad Scan Purpose From Network Keypad Scan Turns the backlight on to easily view the terminal display in dimly lit environments 1 Press to turn the backlight on or off Backlight On 1 Turns the backlight off 0 Press to turn the backlight on or off Backlight Off 0 Note You can use the command to toggle the backlight on and off 7 9 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Change Configuration Purpose From Network Keypad Example 7 10 This command must precede any configuration command parameter If you enter a valid string the terminal configuration parameters are modified and the termina
280. t of ASCII characters and their Code 39 representations see the Full ASCII Table in Appendix B Use Code 39 full ASCII to enter ASCII control characters or lowercase characters as data You should also enable Code 39 full ASCII to use ASCII command characters For example you encode the data sample in Code 39 full ASCII as follows 4 5 A M P L E In Code 39 non full ASCII this label decodes as S5 A M P L E In Code 39 full ASCII this label decodes as sample Configuration Command Reference Code 39 mixed full ASCII Use mixed full ASCII when printers encode the same label two different ways For example if you have a bar code with the data a some printers encode the data as follows D E A In the Full ASCII Table in Appendix B D represents and E represents If you configure the terminal for Code 39 full ASCII the terminal decodes the data as a because there are three valid full ASCII character pairs to represent the data Other printers encode the data a as A The and are valid Code 39 characters in the non full ASCII character set However the terminal will not decode this label if it is configured for full ASCII because the data is not represented by valid full ASCII character pairs To decode the label correctly you need to configure the terminal for mixed full ASCII When you configure the terminal for Code 39 mixed full ASCII the terminal will de
281. te and the access points are installed in your facility You need to work with your network administrator to plan and assign the IP address for each device in the 2 4 GHz network You must assign and set the IP address for the Model 200 Controller each 0100 Access Point and each TRAKKER 2425 terminal Operating the Terminal in a Network 4 Configuring the Model 200 Controller The Model 200 Controller supports communications with the 2 4 GHz network across the Ethernet network When you install and configure the controller you identify the host computer s and TRAKKER 2425 terminals in your network The terminals communicate through the controller with your host computer For help installing the controller see the Model 200 Controller System Manual Part No 063439 To have the T2425 terminal communicate with the controller you must configure these parameters on the controller e Configure the UDP User Datagram Protocol Plus network e Assign an IP address to each TRAKKER 2425 terminal e Enable all T2425 terminals e Define the host environment parameters which includes configuring for terminal emulation or screen mapping e Define the host communications parameters which includes the physical connection network adapter cards to the host computer To use the screen mapping application on the T2425 terminal you must also configure the following e Create the script file using the Script Builder tool on the controller
282. tement la r flexion d un rayon laser ou dans la fen tre du laser lorsque celui ci est en op ration Si vous regardez trop longtemps un rayon laser cela peut endommager votre vue Make sure an input device such as a 1550 laser scanner is attached correctly to the module for cabled scanners You must install an input device before scanning bar code labels 6 23 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Bar Code Labels Will Not Scan continued Problem Solution You have an input device attached to You may not be using an input device that is supported with the module for cabled scanners and the module for cabled scanners Make sure you are using cannot read any bar code labels one of the supported input devices e Intermec 126X and 127X wands e Intermec 146X CCD scanners e Intermec 151x 1545 and 155x laser scanners e JANUS 7010 hand held imager e Compatible Symbol scanners reverse polarity enabled You must use an interface cable to connect the input device to the module If you are using the J7010 imager you need to use a wedge interface cable P N 062168 and set the Cable ID parameter on the J7010 to the Force 97xx Wedge option For help see the TRAKKER 2400 Series Module for Cabled Scanners Instruction Sheet P N 064219 001 The scan module or input device will Try one of these solutions not read the bar code label e Make sure you aim the scanner beam so it crosses the entire
283. ter 7 For example if you load the default values the Controller IP Address is set to a default value of 0 0 0 0 and Beep Volume is set to normal volume level Note If you restore the default configuration you need to set the primary network communications parameters to reestablish communications with other devices in the 2 4 GHz network To restore the terminal s default configuration 1 Press f 7 2 or scan this bar code Enter Test and Service Mode _ The Main Menu appears 2 Choose System Menu and press The System Menu appears 3 Choose the Load Default Values command and press The Load Default Values screen appears 3 21 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Load Default Values Screen OK LOAD DEFAULT VALUES Load default configuration values in RAN Overwrites current configuration CANCEL 242XU 056 4 Choose OK and press to load the default configuration values The default values will override the current runtime configuration on the terminal To exit without loading the default values choose Cancel and press The System Menu appears 5 Press s 6 Choose another menu from the Main Menu or press to exit the System Menu The Main Menu appears Esc to exit the TRAKKER 2400 Menu System For help exiting the menu system see Exiting the
284. the 2 4 GHz network Glossary G controller IP address Identifies the IP address assigned to the Model 200 Controller in the 2 4 GHz network data collection device A device used with a scanner that collects data by scanning bar codes and sending this data to a host computer data transmission An event in which a block of data is transmitted from one device to another default configuration The values set for each configuration parameter when the terminal is shipped device Any physical item that is attached to a computer A terminal a printer a reader and a controller are all devices direct sequencing A radio frequency spread spectrum technique by which the transmitted signal is spread over a particular frequency range domain The area within a LAN that defines a region administered by a controller or server The domain is also called a subnetwork downline A device that is at the terminal end of a connection to the computer is referred to as being downline When devices are connected to a computer they are connected in a line Downline is a direction relative to the computer Contrast with upline If more than one computer is connected in a line the upline computers usually handle data processing and the downline computers usually handle data collection and sometimes data preprocessing TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual G 10 driver Software or firmware that translat
285. the Diagnostics Menu and press The Diagnostics Menu appears DIAGNOSTICS MEHU Software Diagnostics Hardware Diagnostics Eustem Diagnostics N Select item CEnter Next screen CF11 Help CEse Exit 242XU 050 6 37 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 6 38 The Diagnostics Menu contains these commands Software Diagnostics Lets you run software diagnostics to help analyze and fix problems on the terminal For example you can view the Error Logger file to view system errors Hardware Diagnostics Lets you run hardware diagnostics to help analyze and fix problems on the terminal For example you can check the power remaining and the condition of the batteries System Diagnostics Lets you run system diagnostics to help analyze and fix problems on the terminal For example you can run diagnostics to check the communications between the terminal and the 0100 Access Point or the Model 200 Controller Press A or to choose Software Diagnostics Hardware Diagnostics or System Diagnostics and press One of these menus appear SOFTHARE DIAGNOSTICS HARDHARE DIAGNOSTICS Event Group Menu Task Status Clear Task Profiles N Select item CEnter Next screen CFil Help CEscl Exit 242XU 065 SYSTEM DIAGNOSTICS Subsustem Versions Access Point Suspend Resume Test N Felect item CEnter Next screen CFil Help CEscl Exit Battery Status Display Test Key
286. the host In Line mode communications overhead is reduced because input is sent one line at a time instead of one or a few characters at a time If you select Character mode keypad input is immediately sent to the host The Communications screen contains this option COMMUNI CATIONS Host Name VAXi OK CANCEL 242XU 032 5 22 Running Applications 5 Host Name Enter the name of the host to which you want the terminal to connect You can enter a host name that is up to 13 characters long Note If you have linked a terminal with a host name on the Model 200 Controller you do not need to enter a host name in this screen If you have not linked a terminal with a host name on the controller you must enter a host name for this parameter The host name in this screen must match a host name in the list of available hosts defined on the controller The Viewport screen contains these options YViewport Mode Eide Boundary 1 Eide Jump 18 Vertical Boundary Vertical Jump 8 OK CANCEL 242XU 022 Viewport Mode Select one of these viewport movement modes Follow Enables viewport Follow Cursor mode Center Enables viewport Center mode The viewport always centers around the cursor Disable Disables viewport movement You must manually move the cursor to each field in the screen You can set these parameters for Follow Cursor mode only Side Boundar
287. the lighting of the work area Note You should not scan the bar code label straight on In a 2 degree conical dead zone directly above the label the laser beam may reflect back into the scanner window and prevent the terminal from reading the label At certain angles and straight on you may not see the laser beam Scanning Options You can set several configuration command parameters to configure the laser scanner to meet your needs The parameters available are Decode Security Defines the security level to use when decoding bar codes When you select a lower decode security level the terminal can decode bar codes with poorer print quality Scan Ahead Allows you to scan a number of bar code labels at one time The labels are held in a stack until the terminal can process the data Scanner Mode Defines how the scanner operates when you press the Scan button or activate a cabled laser scanner In One Shot mode the laser turns on and stays on until you release the button or scanner trigger or a label is decoded In Automatic mode you can continuously scan bar code labels without having to release the button or scanner trigger between labels Scanner Redundancy Defines the number of scans voting the scanner takes of the same label When set voting requires the terminal to decode the same bar code label multiple times during a single scanner event and compare the decoded information for a match before signaling a good r
288. the terminal has finished initializing the firmware this warning screen appears The terminal creates a configuration file the first time you turn it on xe HARNING TE configuration file not Found Press a key and a default one will he created 242XU 129 Configure the terminal now Follow the instructions in the next section Configuring the Terminal Note To configure the terminal press f _7 2 m and start the TRAKKER 2400 Menu System If you press any other key you will see messages that the terminal cannot connect to the controller Follow the instructions in the next section Configuring the Terminal Getting Started fi Configuring the Terminal You need to set these network parameters to begin using the terminal Time and date Network activate Controller IP address Terminal IP address RF domain RF security identification ID You use the TRAKKER 2400 Menu System to set these parameters Note If the terminal is on a different IP subnetwork from the Model 200 Controller you must also configure the default router and subnet mask For help see Chapter 4 Operating the Terminal in a Network Setting the Time and Date If you have not turned on the terminal follow the instructions for Turning On the Terminal for the First Time earlier in this chapter 1 Press t Q r 2 or scan this bar code label to access the TRAK
289. thium ion main battery pack The NiCad battery will provide backup battery power for a maximum of 1 month if a fully charged main battery pack is installed or for a maximum of 3 days if a main battery pack is not installed null modem cable A cable that connects two computers and allows transmission of data between them without requiring a modem One Shot mode See Scanner mode OSI model Open Systems Interconnection reference model A model for network communications consisting of seven layers that describe what happens when computers communicate with one another The OSI model was developed by the International Standards Organization ISO to provide worldwide standards for computer communications packet The unit of information that the network uses to communicate A packet includes a single network message with its associated header addressing information data and optional trailer A packet can also be called a frame or datagram parameter See configuration command partition See logical partition Glossary G PDF 417 A two dimensional stacked symbology Each row in the symbol includes start stop characters row identifiers and symbol characters which consist of four bars and four spaces each and contain the actual data PDF 417 provides an extensive error detection and correction option that can recover up to 510 characters lost due to a damaged label or to an error in scanning peer to peer network A type of L
290. thout moving the cursor use the Home command Keypad f v Scan Home Hm Delete This command deletes the character at the current cursor position When you delete a character all characters to the right of the cursor shift left one position The cursor must be in an unprotected field when you use this key Keypad t Scan Delete DEL End This command moves the viewport to the end of the last line displayed on the TE application screen When you move the viewport the cursor does not move Keypad ta Scan End END 9 5 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 9 6 Enter This command sends all input to the host computer including the cursor position It lets the host know what data to expect next Enter is an AID key 3270 Keypad or Cor 5250 Keypad Scan Enter lt CR gt Enter TE Configuration Menu This command lets you enter the TE configuration menu where you can make changes to 3270 or 5250 configuration settings Keypad E Scan Not supported Erase Input This command clears all input fields and moves the cursor to the first input position the first input position on the terminal screen on the display This command will not erase protected fields If you press this key when the display shows only protected fields the cursor will return to the home position
291. tion Symbologies Menu 2 of 5 12 of 5 option Symbologies Menu MSI option Symbologies Menu MSI option Symbologies Menu Plessey option Configuring the Terminal 3 Bar Code Symbologies Table continued Parameter Syntax UPC EAN CE UPC A EAN 13 Version A UPC E Version E EAN 8 Supplementals Check digit Number system digit UPC A leading zero Options Disabled Enabled UPC A only Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Yes No Discard Retain Discard Retain Discard Retain Location in Configuration Menu Symbologies Menu UPC EAN option 3 27 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Communications Table Parameter Syntax Controller IP Address NC Default Router NX Network Activate NA Network Loopback NL RF Domain RW RF Security ID RS RF Wakeup On Broadcast RB Subnet Mask NS Terminal IP Address ND UDP Port NG 3 28 Options 0 0 0 0 The IP address field is four numbers separated by periods 0 0 0 0 The Router field is four numbers separated by periods Disabled 2 4 GHz RF enabled Disabled Enabled 0 0 15 None no characters Any 20 ASCII characters No disabled Yes enabled 255 255 255 0 The Subnet Mask field is four numbers separated by periods Each number is from 0 to 255 0 0 0 0 The IP address field is four numbers separated by periods 05555 5001 65535 Location in Con
292. tion Terminal Menu Scanner option Terminal Menu Scanner option Terminal Menu Append Time option If you have a standard range scan module Scanner Selection shows the option Integrated Scanner 3 30 Operating the Terminal in a Network Operating the Terminal in a Network 4 This chapter describes the 2 4 GHz network and explains how the TRAKKER 2425 terminal fits in your network It also explains how to install and configure the terminal use RF communications configure the terminal over the network and provides technical details about network connectivity and protocols How the TRAKKER 2425 Fits Into Your Network The TRAKKER 2425 terminal is a hand held data collection terminal with network support The T2425 terminal communicates with a host computer in the Intermec 2 4 GHz network through the Model 200 Controller across the Ethernet network The 0100 Access Point acts as a bridge to allow communications between the Ethernet network and the wireless T2425 terminals TRAKKER 2425 Terminals in a 2 4 GHz Radio Frequency Data Collection Network Host TRAKKER 2425 terminals D i 0100 Access Point Ethernet Model 200 Controller 242XU 095 4 3 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Installing TRAKKER 2425 Terminals in Multiple Subnetworks Model 200 Controller 192 9 175 7 192 9 175 X subnetwork 192 9 200 X subnet
293. tions xvi About This Manual xvii Getting Started 1 What Is the TRAKKER Antares 2425 Terminal 1 3 Accessories for the Terminal 1 4 Using the Terminal for the First Time 1 5 Unpacking the Terminal 1 5 Charging the Main Battery Pack 1 6 Connecting the Backup Battery 1 6 Installing the Main Battery Pack 1 9 Charging the Backup Battery 1 13 Configuring the Controller and Access Point 1 14 Turning On the Terminal for the First Time 1 15 Configuring the Terminal 1 17 Setting the Time and Date 1 17 Setting the Network Parameters 1 20 Starting the Application 1 25 Verifying That the Terminal Is Operating Correctly 1 26 Turning the Terminal On and Off 1 29 Enabling Bar Code Symbologies 1 30 Where Do You Go From Here 1 32 iii TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Learning How to Use the Terminal TRAKKER 2425 Terminal Features 2 3 2 Using the Keypad 2 4 Finding the Special Keys 2 4 How to Type the Characters Printed on the Keypad 2 6 Using the Function Left Right and Shift Keys 2 7 Capitalizing All Characters 2 8 How to Use the Cursor Keys 2 9 Quick Reference Keypad Chart 2 10 How to Use the Terminal s Display 2 11 Using the Display As a Viewport 2 12 Adjusting the Display From the Keypad 2 13 Understanding the Icons 2 15 Understanding the Terminal s Audio Signals 2 18 Learning About the Terminal s Batteries 2 19 Main Battery Pack 2 19 Removing and Installing the Main Battery Pack 2 20 C
294. to the backup battery The other connector is attached to the terminal Firmly push the two battery wire connectors together until they lock Battery wire connectors 3 lt Backup A Gey battery QZ 242XU 086 1 7 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 3 Gently fold and push the backup battery wires into the open area of the backup battery compartment near the wall 242XU 089 4 Leave the battery door off to continue with the next procedure and install the main battery pack 1 8 Getting Started fi Installing the Main Battery Pack Next install the fully charged main lithium ion battery pack into the TRAKKER 2425 terminal Note You should always keep a charged main battery pack installed in the terminal to maximize the backup battery s life To install the main battery pack 1 If the battery door is not off open the battery door by pushing down on the battery door latch and sliding it toward the bottom end of the terminal Lift up the top edge of the battery door to remove it Battery door L 242XU 079 2 Hold the battery pack with the flat side facing down toward the inside of the battery compartment The small arrow on the top of the battery pack must point toward the top display end of the terminal 1 9 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 3 Place the battery pack into the upper larger half of the battery compartment Connector en
295. tocols defined 4 21 to 4 23 specifications A 5 network activate configuration command 8 43 configuring 1 21 defined 4 9 enabled verifying 1 26 Network Applications screen 6 40 Network Events screen 6 40 Network Loopback command 8 44 New Line command 3270 and 5250 9 11 Next Screen command VTXXX ANSI 10 4 NiCad backup battery See backup battery non full ASCII Code 39 8 16 non recoverable errors 3270 and 5250 TE 6 15 notes defined xvi numbers bar code labels to scan B 10 Numeric mode configuring 5 21 O One Shot mode configuring the scanner 8 56 operating the terminal configuration commands list of 3 29 8 4 A 9 using 8 3 operating the terminal continued configuration options described 3 5 humidity range A 4 reader commands enabling or disabling 8 25 to 8 28 using 7 3 7 8 temperature range A 4 troubleshooting 6 6 to 6 9 verifying network communications 1 26 Operational Assistant Menu 5250 TE 9 3 optical parameters standard range scan module A 6 orange keys using 2 6 ordering replacement parts 6 31 OSI model defining network protocols 4 21 to 4 23 other keys 3270 and 5250 9 22 C 9 P paging keys 3270 and 5250 list of 9 12 using 5 33 VTXXX ANSS list of 10 5 parameters 3270 and 5250 configuring 5 8 configuration overview of 3 3 VTXXX ANSI configuring 5 19 PDF 417 using A 5 physical specifications A 3 to A 6 Plessey command 8 45 POST failed error mess
296. ttery should be visible in the battery compartment Backup battery Main battery pack compartment L 242XU 085 2 Find the two connectors in the backup battery compartment One connector is attached to the backup battery The other connector is attached to the terminal Firmly push the two battery wire connectors together until they lock 2 30 Learning How to Use the Terminal 2 Connecting the Battery Wires Battery wire connectors 242XU 086 3 Gently fold and push the backup battery wires into the open area of the backup battery compartment near the wall 242XU 089 2 31 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 2 32 4 Install a fully charged main battery pack For help see Removing and Installing the Main Battery Pack earlier in this chapter 5 Hook the bottom edge of the battery door into the bottom case above the backup battery compartment Push the door down to close it over the battery compartment Push the battery door latch down and slide it toward the top end of the terminal to lock the door in place Battery door 242XU 088 The main battery pack charges the backup battery The backup battery will be fully charged in approximately 18 hours Note The backup battery charges enough to operate the terminal within 20 minutes However the backup battery will only provide limited backup power if it is not fully charged Learning How to Use the Termin
297. urs minutes and seconds The time is appended to each data record in the form HH MM SS For help see Time in Seconds later in this chapter Disabled DEdata Acceptable values for data are 0 Disabled 1 Enabled One of these bar codes Disable Append Time DE0 Enable Append Time DE1 Configuration Command Reference Automatic Shutoff Purpose Default Syntax Scan Defines the maximum length of time the terminal remains on when there is no activity When you do not use the terminal for the length of time set with this command the terminal automatically turns off as if you had pressed to turn it off When you press 9 to turn on the terminal the terminal either resumes exactly where it was when you turned it off or the terminal boots and restarts your application Resume is controlled through the Resume Execution command For help see Resume Execution later in this chapter Power Management Tip You should use the Automatic Shutoff feature to preserve the main battery pack s power 0 disabled EZdata Acceptable values for data are 0 Disabled always on 02 75 Shutoff time in minutes To disable automatic shutoff scan this bar code Disable Automatic Shutoff EZ0 To set a timeout 1 Scan this bar code Enter Accumulate Mode Set Automatic Shutoff EZ 8 7 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Automatic Shut
298. ut of range will be transmitted over the network The terminal is connected to the 0100 Access Point but is trying to establish communications with the Model 200 Controller and the host computer Make sure the terminal is correctly configured for your network Make sure the controller is configured and running Make sure the host computer is configured and running If you have configured the network correctly try restarting the controller to establish communications You can also try resetting the terminal For help resetting the terminal see Booting and Resetting the Terminal later in this chapter There may have a problem with the connection between the Model 200 Controller and the host computer Check with your network administrator or use the Model 200 Controller System Manual to troubleshoot any potential problems on the controller There may be a problem with the host computer or the connection between the Model 200 Controller and the host computer Check with your network administrator to make sure the host computer is running and allowing users to login to the system Troubleshooting Problems Using Terminal Emulation Applications There are two types of error messages that you may see while running the 3270 or 5250 terminal emulation application on the terminal e Recoverable error e Non recoverable error Recoverable errors display in the status line on the bottom line of the terminal display If the st
299. vate command is enabled and the radio is working 1 If the terminal is not on press to turn it on 2 Look at the top line of the terminal s display If the Radio icon does not appear the Network Activate command is enabled and the radio is working You may see other icons on the display If the Radio icon shown in the illustration remains on solid the Network Activate command is disabled or there is a problem with the radio card and the radio is turned off 242XU 116 1 26 Getting Started fi Make sure the Network Activate command is enabled For help see Configuring the Terminal earlier in this chapter If the network is activated and the Radio icon still appears there may be a problem with the radio For help contact your local Intermec service representative To verify that the terminal is communicating with the 0100 Access Point 1 If the terminal is not on press to turn it on 2 Look at the top line of the terminal s display If the Connect icon blinks shown in the illustration or remains on solid the terminal is communicating with the access point and is trying to establish communications with the controller The terminal can send and receive data to the access point 242XU 128 If the Connect icon is not blinking or is not on you need to check the network configuration For help see Configuring the Controller and Access Point or Configuring the Terminal earlier in this
300. vironment the LCD display may respond and display information more slowly than in a warm environment 2 11 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 2 12 Using the Display As a Viewport The TRAKKER 2425 terminal display shows 16 lines by 20 characters of data at one time In terminal emulation TE applications the terminal s display may show only part of each 25 line by 80 character screen that appears on a full size terminal You can use the terminal display as a viewport to move around and see the entire 25 x 80 screen The viewport lets you view screens and enter data by showing the part of the screen you are using When you are using TE the viewport automatically moves to the cursor when there is data entry from the host computer or the terminal You can configure the viewport for your TE applications to e Follow the cursor e Center the viewport around the cursor For help on configuring the TE viewport options see Chapter 5 Running Applications The first time you turn the terminal on it displays the upper left corner of a full size terminal screen This is the viewport s home position A screen or application that displays more than 16 lines by 20 characters of data at one time has data in the unseen area of the display When you move the cursor or viewport out of the home position upper left corner the Viewport icon displays until the viewport is returned to its home position
301. with the Model 200 Controller You may need to check the terminal configuration or make sure the controller is running and data collection is started Make sure the access point is still turned on Each device in the 2 4 GHz network must have a valid IP address The IP addresses set on the terminal must match the addresses configured on the controller For help see Installing and Configuring the Terminal in Chapter 4 6 13 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Terminal Will Not Communicate With Network Devices continued Problem The terminal is connected to the host computer and you move to a new site to collect data The Connect icon was on and now begins to blink or turns off rreg ISKS The Connect icon blinks on the terminal display and you see this message Unable to connect to controller Error 102 Unable to establish connection to host Session ended The Connect icon remains on but the host computer is not receiving any data from the terminal The Connect icon remains on but you cannot establish a terminal emulation session with the host computer 6 14 Solution You may have gone out of range of an access point Try moving closer to an access point or to a different location to re establish communications Once you are in range again the Connect icon will appear and remain on Any data you collected while you were o
302. work OUIET Ethernet 0100 Access Point 0100 Access Point 0100 Access Point TRAKKER 2425 terminals 192 9 175 10 192 9 175 11 192 9 175 12 242XU 091 T2425 s cannot roam between subnetworks TRAKKER 2425 terminals 192 9 200 5 192 9 200 6 You can install the TRAKKER 2425 terminals 0100 Access Points and Model 200 Controller in your 2 4 GHz network as shown in the illustration above The T2425 terminals may only communicate with the access points that are in the same IP subnetwork All the terminals and access points in this illustration communicate with the controller at IP address 192 9 175 7 4 4 Operating the Terminal in a Network 4 TRAKKER 2425 Terminals Communicating Across Subnetworks Model 200 Controller 192 9 200 5 192 9 175 X subnetwork 192 9 200 X subnetwork Router Ethernet 192 9 175 1 G 0100 Access Point TRAKKER 2425 terminals 192 9 175 9 192 9 175 10 192 9 175 11 242XU 092 You can install the TRAKKER 2425 terminals and 0100 Access Points in one IP subnetwork and install the Model 200 Controller in another IP subnetwork as shown in the illustration In this network you must configure additional network parameters default router and subnet mask as described later in this chapter Note All 0100 Access Points that the TRAKKER 2425 terminal may communicate with and ro
303. x Configuring the Terminal 3 Marking or Clearing Check Boxes on the Reader Command Menu READER COMMAND MEHU CSpace to enable or disable a command Eq Backlight CX Backspace CX Change Config CX Clear CX Default Config CX Enter Accum CX Exit Accum X Multi Read CX Reset J more OK Ecanner On Ecanner OFF Test amp Service CANCEL To move to the next field e Press W or 1 To move to the previous field e Press A 242XU 053 3 11 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Entering ASCII Control Characters You can include ASCII control characters in a postamble or preamble in the TRAKKER 2400 Menu System For a definition of the postamble or preamble see Chapter 8 Configuration Command Reference Note You can also configure the postamble or preamble to characters from the extended ASCII character set such as the Field Exit code for 5250 TE For help see Auto Advancing Through Fields on 5250 TE Screens in Chapter 5 To enter ASCII control characters for a preamble or postamble 1 Decide which ASCII control character you want to set for the preamble or postamble Look up the control character in the Full ASCII Table in Appendix B and find the two digit hexadecimal number For example you find ETX in the Full ASCII Table and learn that 03 is the two digit hexadecimal number for ETX 2 Use the TRAKKER 24
304. x you must configure the terminal to use Code 39 in Full ASCII mode For help see Code 39 in Chapter 8 3270 and 5250 TE Command Summary These charts list the keypad sequences and the bar codes you can scan to perform 3270 and 5250 TE functions on the TRAKKER 2425 terminal 3270 and 5250 TE Keypad Use these keypads to enter terminal emulation functions for TRAKKER 2425 terminals running 3270 or 5250 terminal emulation TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 3270 and 5250 TE Keypads C 4 3270 a Cc T CC gt SP F F8 o a SOS F10 2 M3 Home amp PAI x PgUp 7 8 9 Palit PA2 PgRt 4 5 6 End PA3 PgDn r 1 2 3 BkSp ns Del gt f J 2 L L L J Fn FR Enter f f J eu Fit F2 F3 F14 F15 A B G D E Fie gt FI7 Fi8 Fi9 F20 F G H 1 J rot F22 F23 F24 7 E Eof K L M N o lt NL gt Stat 2 P J Q R S T Sysq Hm Clear Atn Enp E U v w xla Caps p Ctrl Reset z A Te A Es Function Left FnL key T Function Right FnR key 3 e f ne ts Shift key 5250 cc J T Fld Exit gt Fid Exit D F10 M3 O F7 F8 M1 F9 M2 Home amp Fid
305. y The viewport moves when the cursor is this number of characters from the right or left side boundary You can enter a number from 1 to 10 Side Jump The number of characters the viewport moves right or left when you reach a horizontal boundary You can enter a number from 1 to 10 5 23 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 5 24 Vertical Boundary The viewport moves when the cursor is this number of characters from the top or bottom boundary You can enter a number from 1 to 10 Vertical Jump The number of characters the terminal moves up or down when you reach a vertical boundary You can enter a number from 1 to 10 Exiting the TE Configuration Menu After entering all configuration parameters you are prompted to save the new configuration and exit the Configuration Menu You can choose between several options when prompted to save the new configuration To exit the Configuration menu 1 From the TE Configuration menu choose Exit Config and press The Save new configuration screen appears Save new configuration Wes No CANCEL 242XU 023 2 Choose Yes and press if you want to save the TE configuration Your terminal saves the configuration options to flash memory and the sign on screen appears Choose No and press if you do not want to save the TE configuration You exit the TE Configuration menu and the sign on screen appears Choose Cancel a
306. y for every character and function available You use the Function Left FnL Function Right FnR and Shift keys to access characters or perform functions that do not have a physical key on the keypad You also use the Shift key to type uppercase alphabetic characters When you press f f or the key is held in a buffer until you press another key The icon appears on the terminal s display to remind you that the key is being held in the buffer When you press another key the key combination is entered into the terminal and the icon disappears Shift Function left it f 242XU 008 To flush the _f f or key from the buffer without performing any action just press the key again The icon disappears from the display To use the FnL FnR and Shift keys 1 Press f f or The Function Left Function Right or Shift icon appears on the terminal s display For example press The Shift icon appears on the terminal display N 242XU 118 2 Press the second key For example press A to type the uppercase letter A The Shift icon disappears from the terminal s display To flush the key from the keypad buffer without entering any key press f f or again The icon disappears from the terminal s display 2 7 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 2 8 Capitalizing All Characters To type all alphabetic characters as uppercase letters you ca
307. y the system firmware and loads the default configuration currently stored in flash memory bridge An internetworking device that incorporates the physical and data link layers of the OSI model and allows you to connect networks or subnetworks with similar architectures broadcast A type of transmission in which a message sent from the host is received by many devices on the system TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual cabled scanner A wand laser scanner or other device that scans bar code information A cabled scanner is connected to a bar code reader or terminal with a cable rather than being built into integrated in the reader or terminal CCD scanner Charge coupled device A CCD scanner contains no moving parts and uses a light source to illuminate the entire symbol A symbol is scanned electronically using the digitized image of a line through the symbol provided by the linear photodiode array CGA Abbreviation for Color Graphics Adapter CGA is a video adapter board channel The path for transmitting data from a device to the host computer In RF networks it is the frequency hopping sequence the radio card follows The 2 4 GHz bandwidth can be divided into 15 channels check character A character included within a message that performs a check to ensure the accuracy of the message check digit A character included in a bar code whose value is used to do a mathematical check on the value of the d
308. you cannot scan bar code labels or you are having problems with the scan module check these possible problems Problem A scan module is not installed The terminal is turned off You cannot see a red beam of light from the standard range scan module when you press the Scan button and aim the scanner at a bar code label WARNING An input device is not attached to the module for cabled scanners Solution Make sure a scan module is installed correctly You must install either a module for cabled scanners or a standard range scan module before you can use the terminal Make sure the terminal is turned on Press to turn on the terminal There are two possible problems e You may be too far away from the bar code label Try moving closer to the bar code label and scan it again e You may be scanning the bar code label straight on Try changing the scanning angle until the laser beam is the brightest This is the best scanning angle You can test the effective range of the scanner Move within 2 feet of a wall and test the scanner You need to be within the scanning range to scan bar code labels For help on scanning distances see Physical and Environmental Specifications in Appendix A Warning Do not look directly into the window area or at a reflection of the laser beam while the laser is scanning Long term exposure to the laser beam can damage your vision Advertissement Ne regardez pas direc
309. you started by scanning the Enter Accumulate command you must finish the command by scanning the Exit Accumulate command For help see Chapter 8 Configuration Command Reference Scan the Enable Override to temporarily enable all of the reader commands When you are finished remember to disable the override so that your data is not interpreted as a command Enable Override 4 DC3 6 11 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Problems While Configuring the Terminal continued Problem Solution You scan a configuration command to If the Network Activate command is enabled 2 4 GHz set one of these parameters and hear network enabled and you are configuring the terminal three low beeps these addresses must define a valid network configuration e Controller IP Address For example an invalid network configuration would be a controller IP address set to 0 0 0 0 with the network enabled e Terminal IP Address e Default Router To set these four parameters follow these steps e Network Activate 1 Disable the Network Activate NA configuration command 2 Set the terminal IP address and the controller IP address 3 Set the default router address if necessary 4 Enable the Network Activate command You can change an IP address with the network enabled as long as it still defines a valid network configuration 6 12 Troubleshooting Terminal Will Not Communicate With Network Dev
310. ypad illustrated 5 18 C 10 using 5 17 parameters configuring 5 19 terminal type selecting 5 20 using 5 16 See also VTXXX ANSI terminal emulation Antares See TRAKKER 2425 terminal antenna ordering parts 6 31 replacing 6 32 Append Time command 8 6 Application Events screen defined 6 40 Application mode configuring 5 21 applications 3270 and 5250 screen mapping 5 26 3270 and 5250 terminal emulation 5 5 host computer developing 4 17 to 4 20 options described 1 3 5 3 A 4 restarting 6 30 7 13 starting 1 25 5 4 TRAKKER 2400 Menu System using 3 6 to 3 16 troubleshooting 3270 and 5250 6 15 to 6 17 screen mapping 6 18 to 6 22 verifying network communications 1 28 VTXXX ANSI terminal emulation 5 16 ARP defined 4 23 ASCII bar code chart B 6 to B 13 Code 39 full 8 16 Code 39 mixed full 8 17 Code 39 non full 8 16 control characters list of B 5 postamble and preamble entering 3 12 table of character equivalents B 3 to B 5 Attention command 3270 and 5250 9 3 audio signals keypad clicks enabling or disabling 8 40 list of 2 18 low battery 2 34 testing 6 46 volume adjusting 2 14 8 8 auto advancing through fields configuring 5 14 Automatic mode configuring the scanner 8 56 Automatic Shutoff command 8 7 managing the battery power 2 35 automatically turning the terminal off 8 7 B backlight configuring the timeout 8 34 key using 2 13 turning on and off 2 13 7 9 backs
311. ypad Caps Lock command using 8 39 keypad using 2 8 Caps Lock icon described 2 8 2 15 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual cautions defined xvi CCD scanners configuring for scan module 8 59 list for scan module A 6 Center Viewport mode configuring 5 11 5 23 CGA compatible display described 2 3 2 11 A 4 change configuration configuration commands using 8 5 reader commands using 7 10 Character mode configuring for VTXXX ANSI 5 22 characters configuring size for 3270 and 5250 5 9 size for VTXXX ANSI 5 20 charging batteries backup battery 1 13 2 26 battery pack 1 6 2 25 cold temperatures guidelines 6 27 check boxes in screens 3 10 clear 3270 and 5250 command 9 4 reader command 7 6 Clear Task Profiles screen defined 6 41 Codabar command 8 10 Code 1 using A 5 Code 11 command 8 12 Code 128 command 8 23 Code 16K command 8 13 Code 2 of 5 command 8 14 disabled with Interleaved 2 of 5 8 37 Code 39 configuration command 8 16 creating bar code labels 8 3 table of ASCII characters B 3 to B 5 Code 49 command 8 20 Code 93 command 8 22 cold temperatures guidelines for using in 2 11 2 19 2 26 6 27 Command Processing command 8 25 to 8 28 commands 3270 and 5250 TE 9 3 C 3 configuration commands using 8 3 conventions defined xxi reader commands using 7 3 TRAKKER 2400 Menu System selecting 3 9 VTXXX ANSI TE 10 3 C 10 communications configuration command
312. ys the current volts temperature and the charging status yes or no The PIC Rev field is the firmware version that is running on the battery monitor processor The number in parenthesis after the volts and temperature is the hexadecimal value returned from the processor For more information about the power remaining in the battery pack use the Battery Status diagnostic screen Battery Status Purpose Where Available Sample Screen Definition Troubleshooting Use the Battery Status screen to find out how much power you have remaining in the main lithium ion battery pack and to get the current power status for the backup NiCad battery Hardware Diagnostics menu BATTERY STATUS Main Battery Capacity TE 307 BACKUP BATTERY cooTDp CEsecl Exit 242XU 141 Main Battery Capacity tells you the percentage of battery power remaining in the battery pack For example there is 30 power remaining You can continue using the battery pack until the Battery icon appears on the display to indicate a low battery The backup battery test shows that the backup battery power is either GOOD or LOW If the status is LOW turn off the terminal Let the main battery pack charge the backup battery The backup battery will be fully charged in approximately 18 hours 6 45 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Beeper Test Purpose Where Available Sample Screen Definition 6 46

"user manual"

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

&quot;user manual&quot;

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

"user manual"